Table of Contents
- GS1350 Series
- User’s Guide
- Technical Reference
- The Web Configurator
- Initial Setup Example
- Tutorials
- Status
- Basic Setting
- VLAN
- Static MAC Forwarding
- Static Multicast Forwarding
- Filtering
- Spanning Tree Protocol
- Bandwidth Control
- Broadcast Storm Control
- Mirroring
- Link Aggregation
- Time Range
- Queuing Method
- Multicast
- AAA
- DHCP Snooping
- Loop Guard
- Error Disable
- Green Ethernet
- Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
- Auto PD Recovery
- Differentiated Services
- DHCP
- 29.1 DHCP Overview
- 29.2 DHCP Configuration
- 29.3 DHCPv4 Status
- 29.4 DHCPv4 Relay
- 29.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information
- 29.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile
- 29.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay
- 29.4.4 Configure DHCPv4 Global Relay Port
- 29.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example
- 29.4.6 Configure DHCPv4 VLAN Setting
- 29.4.7 Configure DHCPv4 VLAN Port
- 29.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
- 29.5 DHCPv6 Relay
- ARP Setup
- Maintenance
- Access Control
- Diagnostic
- System Log
- Syslog Setup
- Cluster Management
- MAC Table
- ARP Table
- Path MTU Table
- Configure Clone
- IPv6 Neighbor Table
- Port Status
- Troubleshooting and Appendices
Zyxel GS1350-26HP User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for GS1350-26HP by Zyxel which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Default Login Details
User’s Guide
GS1350 Series
GbE Layer 2 PoE Switch
Copyright © 2019 Zyxel Communications Corporation
Management IP
Address
http://DHCP-assigned IP
or
http://192.168.1.1
User Name admin
Password 1234
Version 4.60 Edition 1, 05/2019
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
2
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
This is a User’s Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features. Screenshots
and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product
firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information
in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
•CLI Reference Guide
The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) to configure the
Switch.
Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Switch.
•Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Switch.
• Online Help
Click the help link for a description of the fields in the Switch menus.
•More Information
Go to https://businessforum.zyxel.com for product discussions.
Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Switch.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
3
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to
configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• All models may be referred to as the “Switch” in this guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Basic Setting >
Switch Setup > Select VLAN Type means you first click Basic Setting in the navigation panel, then the
Switch Setup sub menu and finally the Select VLAN Type tab to get to that screen.
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this user guide may use the following generic icons. The Switch icon is not an exact
representation of your device.
Switch Generic Router Wireless Router / Access Point
Generic Switch Smart TV Desktop
Laptop IP Camera Printer
Server
Contents Overview
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
4
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ......................................................................................................................................17
Getting to Know Your Switch .............................................................................................................. 18
Hardware Installation and Connection ............................................................................................. 25
Hardware Panels .................................................................................................................................. 31
Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................39
The Web Configurator ......................................................................................................................... 40
Initial Setup Example ............................................................................................................................ 64
Tutorials .................................................................................................................................................. 68
Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 75
Basic Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 81
VLAN .................................................................................................................................................... 109
Static MAC Forwarding ...................................................................................................................... 123
Static Multicast Forwarding ............................................................................................................... 125
Filtering ................................................................................................................................................. 129
Spanning Tree Protocol ...................................................................................................................... 131
Bandwidth Control ............................................................................................................................. 137
Broadcast Storm Control ................................................................................................................... 139
Mirroring ............................................................................................................................................... 141
Link Aggregation ................................................................................................................................ 143
Time Range ......................................................................................................................................... 150
Queuing Method ................................................................................................................................ 152
Multicast .............................................................................................................................................. 155
AAA ...................................................................................................................................................... 162
DHCP Snooping .................................................................................................................................. 171
Loop Guard ......................................................................................................................................... 182
Error Disable ......................................................................................................................................... 185
Green Ethernet ................................................................................................................................... 192
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) ................................................................................................ 194
Auto PD Recovery .............................................................................................................................. 216
Differentiated Services ....................................................................................................................... 218
DHCP .................................................................................................................................................... 222
ARP Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 234
Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................... 238
Access Control .................................................................................................................................... 248
Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................... 272
System Log .......................................................................................................................................... 275
Syslog Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 277
Contents Overview
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
5
Cluster Management ......................................................................................................................... 280
MAC Table ........................................................................................................................................... 286
ARP Table ............................................................................................................................................ 289
Path MTU Table ................................................................................................................................... 291
Configure Clone ................................................................................................................................. 292
IPv6 Neighbor Table ........................................................................................................................... 294
Port Status ............................................................................................................................................ 296
Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................................................................303
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 304
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
6
Table of Contents
Document Conventions ....... .... ... .... .................. .... .................. .... .................. .... ................... ... ............3
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................4
Table of Contents.................................................................................................................................6
Part I: User’s Guide..........................................................................................17
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your Switch ............................................................................................................18
1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 18
1.1.1 ZON Utility ............................................................................................................................... 18
1.1.2 PoE .......................................................................................................................................... 19
1.2 Example Applications .................................................................................................................... 19
1.2.1 PoE Example Application ..................................................................................................... 19
1.2.2 Backbone Example Application ......................................................................................... 20
1.2.3 Bridging / Fiber Uplink Example Application ...................................................................... 21
1.2.4 High Performance Switching Example ............................................................................... 22
1.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples ........................................................................... 22
1.3 Ways to Manage the Switch ......................................................................................................... 23
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch ........................................................................................23
Chapter 2
Hardware Installation and Connection ...........................................................................................25
2.1 Installation Scenarios ...................................................................................................................... 25
2.2 Desktop Installation Procedure .................................................................................................... 25
2.3 Wall Mounting ................................................................................................................................. 26
2.3.1 Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................... 26
2.4 Rack Mounting ............................................................................................................................... 28
2.4.1 Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................... 28
2.4.2 Precautions ........................................................................................................................... 29
2.4.3 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch ............................................................... 29
2.4.4 Mounting the Switch on a Rack .......................................................................................... 29
Chapter 3
Hardware Panels................................................................................................................................31
3.1 Front Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.1 Gigabit Ethernet Ports .......................................................................................................... 31
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
7
3.1.2 PoE .......................................................................................................................................... 32
3.1.3 SFP Slots .................................................................................................................................. 32
3.2 Rear Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 34
3.2.1 Grounding .............................................................................................................................. 34
3.2.2 Power Connection ................................................................................................................ 35
3.2.3 4-Pin Console Port ................................................................................................................ 36
3.3 LEDs ................................................................................................................................................ 36
Part II: Technical Reference...........................................................................39
Chapter 4
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................40
4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 40
4.2 System Login ................................................................................................................................... 40
4.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility .................................................................................................... 44
4.3.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 44
4.3.2 Run the ZON Utility ................................................................................................................. 44
4.4 Wizard .............................................................................................................................................. 48
4.4.1 Basic ....................................................................................................................................... 48
4.4.2 Protection .............................................................................................................................. 53
4.4.3 VLAN ....................................................................................................................................... 55
4.4.4 QoS ......................................................................................................................................... 56
4.5 Web Configurator Layout ............................................................................................................. 57
4.5.1 Change Your Password ....................................................................................................... 61
4.6 Save Your Configuration ................................................................................................................ 62
4.7 Switch Lockout ............................................................................................................................... 62
4.8 Reset the Switch ............................................................................................................................ 62
4.8.1 The Restore Button ................................................................................................................ 62
4.8.2 Restore Custom Default ....................................................................................................... 63
4.8.3 Reboot the Switch ................................................................................................................ 63
4.9 Log Out of the Web Configurator ............................................................................................... 63
4.10 Help ............................................................................................................................................... 63
Chapter 5
Initial Setup Example.........................................................................................................................64
5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 64
5.1.1 Create a VLAN ...................................................................................................................... 64
5.1.2 Set Port VID ............................................................................................................................ 65
5.1.3 Configure Switch Management IP Address ....................................................................... 66
Chapter 6
Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................68
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
8
6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 68
6.2 How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch ............................................................................. 68
6.3 How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch .................................................................................... 71
6.3.1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction ........................................................................................ 71
6.3.2 Create a VLAN ...................................................................................................................... 71
6.3.3 Configure DHCPv4 Relay ..................................................................................................... 73
6.3.4 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 74
Chapter 7
Status...................................................................................................................................................75
7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 75
7.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................. 75
7.2 Status ................................................................................................................................................ 75
7.2.1 Neighbor Screen .................................................................................................................. 77
7.2.2 Neighbor Detail ..................................................................................................................... 79
Chapter 8
Basic Setting .......................................................................................................................................81
8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 81
8.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................. 81
8.2 System Information ...................................................................................................................... 81
8.3 General Setup ............................................................................................................................... 83
8.4 Introduction to VLANs ................................................................................................................... 84
8.5 Switch Setup ................................................................................................................................... 85
8.6 IP Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 86
8.6.1 Management IP Addresses ..................................................................................................86
8.7 Port Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 88
8.8 PoE Status ....................................................................................................................................... 90
8.8.1 PoE Time Range Setup ......................................................................................................... 92
8.8.2 PoE Setup .............................................................................................................................. 93
8.9 Interface Setup ............................................................................................................................... 95
8.10 IPv6 ................................................................................................................................................. 96
8.10.1 IPv6 Interface Status ........................................................................................................... 96
8.10.2 IPv6 Configuration .............................................................................................................. 98
8.10.3 IPv6 Global Setup ................................................................................................................ 99
8.10.4 IPv6 Interface Setup .......................................................................................................... 100
8.10.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup .......................................................................................... 101
8.10.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup ...............................................................................................102
8.10.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup ....................................................................................... 102
8.10.8 IPv6 Neighbor Setup ......................................................................................................... 103
8.10.9 DHCPv6 Client Setup ........................................................................................................ 105
8.11 DNS ............................................................................................................................................... 106
8.12 Cloud Management .................................................................................................................. 106
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
9
8.12.1 Nebula Center Control Discovery ................................................................................... 107
8.12.2 Nebula Switch Registration ..............................................................................................107
Chapter 9
VLAN..................................................................................................................................................109
9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 109
9.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................... 109
9.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................... 109
9.2 VLAN Status .................................................................................................................................. 111
9.2.1 VLAN Details ....................................................................................................................... 112
9.3 VLAN Configuration .................................................................................................................... 113
9.4 Configure a Static VLAN ............................................................................................................ 113
9.5 Configure VLAN Port Settings .................................................................................................... 115
9.6 Voice VLAN ................................................................................................................................... 116
9.7 MAC Based VLAN ......................................................................................................................... 118
9.8 Vendor ID Based VLAN ................................................................................................................ 119
9.9 Port-Based VLAN Setup .............................................................................................................. 121
9.9.1 Configure a Port-Based VLAN ........................................................................................... 121
Chapter 10
Static MAC Forwarding....................................................................................................................123
10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 123
10.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 123
10.2 Configure Static MAC Forwarding ..........................................................................................123
Chapter 11
Static Multicast Forwarding.............................................................................................................125
11.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 125
11.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 125
11.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 125
11.2 Configure Static Multicast Forwarding .....................................................................................126
Chapter 12
Filtering..............................................................................................................................................129
12.1 Filtering Overview ...................................................................................................................... 129
12.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 129
12.2 Configure a Filtering Rule .......................................................................................................... 129
Chapter 13
Spanning Tree Protocol ...................................................................................................................131
13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview ........................................................................................... 131
13.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 131
13.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 131
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
10
13.2 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status ....................................................................................133
13.3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ............................................................................. 134
Chapter 14
Bandwidth Control ...........................................................................................................................137
14.1 Bandwidth Control Overview ................................................................................................... 137
14.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 137
14.2 Bandwidth Control Setup .......................................................................................................... 137
Chapter 15
Broadcast Storm Control .................................................................................................................139
15.1 Broadcast Storm Control Overview .........................................................................................139
15.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 139
15.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup ................................................................................................ 139
Chapter 16
Mirroring............................................................................................................................................141
16.1 Mirroring Overview .................................................................................................................... 141
16.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 141
16.2 Port Mirroring Setup .................................................................................................................... 141
Chapter 17
Link Aggregation .......... .... .... .... .................. .... .................. .................. .... ................... ... ...................143
17.1 Link Aggregation Overview ...................................................................................................... 143
17.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 143
17.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 143
17.2 Link Aggregation Status ............................................................................................................. 144
17.3 Link Aggregation Setting .......................................................................................................... 145
17.3.1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol .............................................................................. 146
17.4 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 148
17.4.1 Static Trunking Example ................................................................................................... 148
Chapter 18
Time Range.......................................................................................................................................150
18.1 Time Range Overview ............................................................................................................... 150
18.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 150
18.2 Configuring Time Range ............................................................................................................ 150
Chapter 19
Queuing Method..............................................................................................................................152
19.1 Queuing Method Overview ..................................................................................................... 152
19.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 152
19.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 152
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
11
19.2 Configuring Queuing ................................................................................................................. 153
Chapter 20
Multicast............................................................................................................................................155
20.1 Multicast Overview ..................................................................................................................... 155
20.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 155
20.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 155
20.2 Multicast Setup ........................................................................................................................... 156
20.3 IPv4 Multicast Status .................................................................................................................. 156
20.3.1 IGMP Snooping ................................................................................................................. 157
20.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN ...................................................................................................... 159
20.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile ........................................................................................................ 160
Chapter 21
AAA...................................................................................................................................................162
21.1 AAA Overview ........................................................................................................................... 162
21.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 162
21.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 162
21.2 AAA Screens ............................................................................................................................... 163
21.3 RADIUS Server Setup .................................................................................................................. 163
21.4 AAA Setup .................................................................................................................................. 165
21.5 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 168
21.5.1 Vendor Specific Attribute ................................................................................................ 168
21.5.2 Supported RADIUS Attributes ........................................................................................... 169
21.5.3 Attributes Used for Authentication .................................................................................. 169
Chapter 22
DHCP Snooping................................................................................................................................171
22.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 171
22.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 171
22.2 DHCP Snooping .......................................................................................................................... 171
22.3 DHCP Snooping Configure ....................................................................................................... 174
22.3.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure ..................................................................................... 176
22.3.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ................................................................................... 177
22.3.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure ............................................................................ 178
22.4 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 179
22.4.1 DHCP Snooping Overview ............................................................................................... 179
Chapter 23
Loop Guard ......................................................................................................................................182
23.1 Loop Guard Overview .............................................................................................................. 182
23.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 182
23.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 182
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
12
23.2 Loop Guard Setup ...................................................................................................................... 184
Chapter 24
Error Disable......................................................................................................................................185
24.1 Error Disable Overview .............................................................................................................. 185
24.1.1 CPU Protection Overview ................................................................................................ 185
24.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview .................................................................................... 185
24.1.3 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 185
24.2 Error Disable Screen .................................................................................................................... 186
24.3 Error-Disable Status .................................................................................................................... 186
24.4 CPU Protection Configuration .................................................................................................. 188
24.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration ......................................................................................... 189
24.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration .....................................................................................190
Chapter 25
Green Ethernet.............. .... ................... ... ................... .................. .... .................. ..............................192
25.1 Green Ethernet Overview ......................................................................................................... 192
25.2 Configuring Green Ethernet ...................................................................................................... 192
Chapter 26
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) .............................................................................................194
26.1 LLDP Overview ............................................................................................................................ 194
26.2 LLDP-MED Overview ................................................................................................................... 195
26.3 LLDP Screens ............................................................................................................................... 196
26.4 LLDP Local Status ....................................................................................................................... 197
26.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail ..........................................................................................198
26.5 LLDP Remote Status ................................................................................................................... 201
26.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail ...................................................................................... 202
26.6 LLDP Configuration .................................................................................................................... 208
26.6.1 LLDP Configuration Basic TLV Setting ............................................................................. 209
26.6.2 LLDP Configuration Org-specific TLV Setting ................................................................ 210
26.7 LLDP-MED Configuration ........................................................................................................... 211
26.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy ......................................................................................................... 211
26.9 LLDP-MED Location ................................................................................................................... 213
Chapter 27
Auto PD Recovery......... .... ................... ... ................... ... ................... ... ................... .... ......................216
27.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 216
27.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 216
27.2 Auto PD Recovery ...................................................................................................................... 216
Chapter 28
Differentiated Services ....................................................................................................................218
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
13
28.1 DiffServ Overview ...................................................................................................................... 218
28.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 218
28.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 218
28.2 Activating DiffServ ..................................................................................................................... 219
28.3 DSCP Settings ............................................................................................................................ 220
28.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings ...............................................................................................221
Chapter 29
DHCP .................................................................................................................................................222
29.1 DHCP Overview .......................................................................................................................... 222
29.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 222
29.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 222
29.2 DHCP Configuration ................................................................................................................... 223
29.3 DHCPv4 Status ........................................................................................................................... 223
29.4 DHCPv4 Relay ............................................................................................................................ 223
29.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information ................................................................................... 224
29.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile ................................................................................................. 225
29.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay ................................................................................. 226
29.4.4 Configure DHCPv4 Global Relay Port ........................................................................... 227
29.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example .................................................................. 228
29.4.6 Configure DHCPv4 VLAN Setting ................................................................................. 229
29.4.7 Configure DHCPv4 VLAN Port ....................................................................................... 230
29.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs ............................................................................. 231
29.5 DHCPv6 Relay ............................................................................................................................. 232
Chapter 30
ARP Setup..........................................................................................................................................234
30.1 ARP Overview ............................................................................................................................ 234
30.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 234
30.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 234
30.2 ARP Setup .................................................................................................................................... 236
30.2.1 ARP Learning .................................................................................................................... 236
Chapter 31
Maintenance....................................................................................................................................238
31.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 238
31.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 238
31.2 The Maintenance Screen ........................................................................................................ 238
31.2.1 Erase Running-Configuration .......................................................................................... 240
31.2.2 Save Configuration ........................................................................................................... 240
31.2.3 Reboot System .................................................................................................................. 240
31.3 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................... 241
31.4 Restore Configuration ................................................................................................................ 243
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
14
31.5 Backup Configuration ................................................................................................................ 243
31.6 Tech-Support .............................................................................................................................. 244
31.7 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 245
31.7.1 FTP Command Line ........................................................................................................... 245
31.7.2 Filename Conventions ..................................................................................................... 245
31.7.3 FTP Command Line Procedure ....................................................................................... 246
31.7.4 GUI-based FTP Clients ....................................................................................................... 246
31.7.5 FTP Restrictions .................................................................................................................. 247
Chapter 32
Access Control.................................................................................................................................248
32.1 Access Control Overview ......................................................................................................... 248
32.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 248
32.2 The Access Control Main Screen .............................................................................................. 248
32.3 Configure SNMP ....................................................................................................................... 249
32.3.1 Configure SNMP Trap Group ........................................................................................ 250
32.3.2 Enable/Disable Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port ......................................................... 251
32.3.3 Configure SNMP User ..................................................................................................... 252
32.4 Set Up Login Accounts .............................................................................................................. 254
32.5 Service Access Control ............................................................................................................ 256
32.6 Remote Management ......................................................................................................... 257
32.7 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 258
32.7.1 About SNMP ...................................................................................................................... 258
32.7.2 SSH Overview ..................................................................................................................... 264
32.7.3 Introduction to HTTPS ........................................................................................................ 266
32.7.4 Google Chrome Warning Messages .............................................................................. 270
Chapter 33
Diagnostic.........................................................................................................................................272
33.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 272
33.2 Diagnostic .................................................................................................................................. 272
Chapter 34
System Log........................................................................................................................................275
34.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 275
34.2 System Log .................................................................................................................................. 275
Chapter 35
Syslog Setup .....................................................................................................................................277
35.1 Syslog Overview .......................................................................................................................... 277
35.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 277
35.2 Syslog Setup ................................................................................................................................ 277
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
15
Chapter 36
Cluster Management............................................................................................................. ..........280
36.1 Cluster Management Overview ..............................................................................................280
36.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 280
36.2 Cluster Management Status ..................................................................................................... 281
36.3 Clustering Management Configuration ................................................................................ 282
36.4 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 283
36.4.1 Cluster Member Switch Management .......................................................................... 283
Chapter 37
MAC Table........................................................................................................................................286
37.1 MAC Table Overview ................................................................................................................ 286
37.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 286
37.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 286
37.2 Viewing the MAC Table ............................................................................................................ 287
Chapter 38
ARP Table..........................................................................................................................................289
38.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 289
38.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 289
38.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 289
38.2 Viewing the ARP Table ............................................................................................................... 289
Chapter 39
Path MTU Table.................................................................................................................................291
39.1 Path MTU Overview .................................................................................................................. 291
39.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table ..................................................................................................... 291
Chapter 40
Configure Clone........................... .... .................. .... .................. .... .................. .... ..............................292
40.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 292
40.2 Configure Clone ........................................................................................................................ 292
Chapter 41
IPv6 Neighbor Table.........................................................................................................................294
41.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview ................................................................................................. 294
41.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table ............................................................................................. 294
Chapter 42
Port Status .........................................................................................................................................296
42.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 296
42.2 Port Status ................................................................................................................................... 296
42.2.1 Port Details ...................................................................................................................... 297
Table of Contents
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
16
42.2.2 DDMI ................................................................................................................................... 300
42.2.3 DDMI Details ...................................................................................................................... 300
42.2.4 Port Utilization ................................................................................................................. 302
Part III: Troubleshooting and Appendices..................................................303
Chapter 43
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................304
43.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ............................................................................... 304
43.2 Switch Access and Login ........................................................................................................... 305
43.3 Switch Configuration .................................................................................................................. 306
Appendix A Customer Support ..................................................................................................... 308
Appendix B Common Services...................................................................................................... 314
Appendix C IPv6.............................................................................................................................. 317
Appendix D Legal Information ...................................................................................................... 325
Index .................................................................................................................................................329
17
PART I
User’s Guide
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
18
CHAPTER 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
1.1 Introduction
The GS1350 Series consists of the following models:
• GS1350-6HP
• GS1350-12HP
• GS1350-18HP
• GS1350-26HP
All models are referred to as the “Switch” in this guide. The Switch can be configured and managed by
the web configurator. It can also be managed via Telnet or third-party SNMP management.
The following table describes the hardware features of the Switch by model.
1.1.1 ZON Utility
With its built-in web configurator, including the Neighbor Management feature (Section 7.2.1 on page
77), viewing, managing and configuring the Switch and its neighboring devices is easy.
In addition, Zyxel offers a proprietary software program called Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility, it is a
utility tool that assists you to set up and maintain network devices in a more simple and efficient way.
You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC (Windows operation system).
For more information on ZON Utility see Section 4.3 on page 44.
Table 1 GS1350 Series Comparison Table
FEATURES GS1350-6HP GS1350-12HP GS1350-18HP GS1350-26HP
Number of 10/100/1000 Mbps
Ethernet ports
5 101624
Number of 10/100/1000 Mbps PoE
ports
581624
Number of GbE combo ports (dual
personality interfaces)
--22
Number of 1 Gbps SFP interfaces 1 2 - -
4-pin console port
(for troubleshooting only)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Auto-Fan Fanless Yes Yes Yes
Wall-mount Yes Yes No No
Rack-mount No Yes Yes Yes
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
19
1.1.2 PoE
The Switch is a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) because it provides a source of power via its Ethernet
ports. Each device that receives power through an Ethernet port is a Powered Device (PD).
The Switch can adjust the power supplied to each PD according to the PoE standard the PD supports.
PoE standards are:
• IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE)
• IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet (PoE) Plus
• IEEE 802.3bt 4PPoE Type 3
The following table describes the PoE features of the Switch by model.
1.2 Example Applications
This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments. Note that the
Switch in the figure is just an example Switch and not your actual Switch.
1.2.1 PoE Example Application
The following example figure shows a Switch supplying PoE (Power over Ethernet) to Powered Devices
(PDs) such as an IP camera, a wireless router, an IP telephone and a general outdoor router that are not
within reach of a power outlet.
Table 2 Models and PoE Features
POE FEATURES GS1350-6HP GS1350-12HP GS1350-18HP GS1350-26HP
IEEE 802.3af PoE Yes Yes Yes Yes
IEEE 802.3at PoE Plus Yes Yes Yes Yes
IEEE 802.3bt 4PPoE Type 3 Yes (port1 and
port2 only)
No No No
Power Management Mode Consumption
Classification
Consumption
Classification
Consumption
Classification
Consumption
Classification
PoE Power Budget 60 W 130 W 250 W 375 W
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
20
Figure 1 PoE Example Application
1.2.2 Backbone Example Application
The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future.
The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users. You can connect computers and
servers directly to the Switch’s port or connect other switches to the Switch.
In this example, all computers can share high-speed applications on the server. To expand the network,
simply add more networking devices such as switches, routers, computers, print servers etc.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
21
Figure 2 Backbone Application
1.2.3 Bridging / Fiber Uplink Example Application
In this example, the Switch connects different company departments (RD and Sales) to the corporate
backbone. It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks. All
users that need high bandwidth can connect to high-speed department servers via the Switch. You can
provide a super-fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet/SFP port on the Switch.
Figure 3 Bridging / Fiber Uplink Example Application
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
22
1.2.4 High Performance Switching Example
The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth. In the following example, use
trunking to connect these two networks.
Switching to higher-speed LANs such as ATM (Asynchronous Transmission Mode) is not feasible for most
people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards, restructuring
your network and complex maintenance. The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much
lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches. Moreover, the current LAN
structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other.
Figure 4 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application
1.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Stations on a logical network belong to one group. A station can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group(s)
unless such traffic first goes through a router.
For more information on VLANs, refer to Chapter 9 on page 109.
1.2.5.1 Tag-based VLAN Example
Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network
performance through reduced broadcast traffic. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding,
moving or changing ports without any re-cabling.
Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server. In the
following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1. Ports can belong to
other VLAN groups too.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
23
Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example
1.3 Ways to Manage the Switch
Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a (supported)
web browser. See Chapter 4 on page 40.
• Command Line Interface. Line commands offer an alternative to the web configurator and in some
cases are necessary to configure advanced features. See the CLI Reference Guide.
• FTP. Use FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. See Section 31.7.1 on page
245.
• SNMP. The Switch can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See Section 32.7.1 on page 258.
• Cluster Management. Cluster Management allows you to manage multiple switches through one
switch, called the cluster manager. See Chapter 35 on page 277.
• ZON Utility. ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and perform initial setup on a
network more efficiently. See Section 4.3 on page 44.
• NCC (Zyxel Nebula Control Center). With the NCC, you can remotely manage and monitor the
Switch through a cloud-based network management system. See Section 8.12 on page 106 or the
NCC User’s Guide for detailed information about how to access the NCC and manage your Switch
via the NCC. See the NCC User’s Guide for how to configure Nebula managed devices.
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch
Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of
characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
24
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working
configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your
password, you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier
configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Switch. You could simply restore your
last configuration.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
25
CHAPTER 2
Hardware Installation and
Connection
2.1 Installation Scenarios
This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch.
The Switch can be:
• Placed on a desktop.
• Wall-mounted on a wall
• Rack-mounted on a standard EIA rack.
Note: Ask an authorized technician to attach the Switch under a desk or to the rack/wall. See
the Installation Requirements sections in this chapter to know the types of screws and
screw drivers for each mounting method.
WARNING! Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
See Table 1 on page 18 for the comparison table of the hardware installation methods for each model.
To start using the Switch, simply connect the power cables and turn it on.
WARNING! The surface of the Switch could be hot when it’s functioning.
Do NOT put your hands on it. You may get burned. This could happen
especially when you’re using the GS1350-6HP. It’s a compact and
fanless Switch capable of supplying Power over Ethernet (PoE).
WARNING! The Switches with fans are not suitable for use in locations
where children are likely to be present.
2.2 Desktop Installation Procedure
1Make sure the Switch is clean and dry.
2Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet.
3Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch. These rubber feet help protect the
Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
26
Note: To make sure of air circulation, do NOT remove the rubber feet.
Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet
4Set the Switch on a smooth, level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the
connected cables. Make sure there is a power outlet nearby.
5Make sure there is at least 40 mm of clearance around and from the surface to the bottom of the Switch
to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord.
Note: Make sure that you meet the requirements of clearance when you use the Switch for
stacking. It’s recommended to only use the Switch with fans in a stack. See Table 1 on
page 18 to see whether your Switch has fans.
WARNING! Do NOT block the ventilation holes nor store things on the
Switch. Allow clearance for the ventilation holes to prevent your Switch
from overheating. This is especially crucial when your Switch doesn’t
have fans. Overheating could affect the performance of your Switch, or
even damage it.
2.3 Wall Mounting
The Switch can be mounted on a wall (see Table 1 on page 18). You may need screw anchors if
mounting on a concrete or brick wall.
2.3.1 Installation Requirements
• Distance above the floor: At least 1.8 m (5.9 feet)
• Distance between holes: 78 mm (3.071 inches)
• Two M4 screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver
• Two screw anchors (optional)
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
27
1Select a position free of obstructions on a wall strong enough to hold the weight of the Switch.
2Mark two holes on the wall at the appropriate distance apart for the screws.
WARNING! Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside
the wall when drilling holes for the screws.
3If using screw anchors, drill two holes for the screw anchors into the wall. Push the anchors into the full
depth of the holes, then insert the screws into the anchors. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave
a small gap of about 0.5 cm.
If not using screw anchors, use a screwdriver to insert the screws into the wall. Do not insert the screws all
the way in - leave a gap of about 0.5 cm.
4Make sure the screws are fastened well enough to hold the weight of the Switch with the connection
cables.
5Align the holes on the back of the Switch with the screws on the wall. Hang the Switch on the screws.
Note: Make sure there is enough clearance between the wall and the Switch to allow
ventilation.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
28
WARNING! The Switch should be wall-mounted horizontally, and make sure
the front panel is facing down. The Switch's side panels with ventilation slots
should not be facing up or down as this position is less safe.
2.4 Rack Mounting
The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size, 19-inch rack or in a wiring closet with other
equipment (see Table 1 on page 18). Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a standard EIA
rack using a rack-mounting kit.
Note: Make sure there is enough clearance between each equipment on the rack for air
circulation.
2.4.1 Installation Requirements
• Two mounting brackets.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
29
• Eight M3 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
• Four M5 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
2.4.2 Precautio ns
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains.
• Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take all
necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.
2.4.3 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch
1Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch, lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with
the screw holes on the side of the Switch.
Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into
the Switch.
3Repeat steps 1 and 3 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch.
4You may now mount the Switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.
2.4.4 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
1Position a mounting bracket (that is already attached to the Switch) on one side of the rack, lining up
the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
30
Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack (GS1350-12HP/18HP)
Figure 9 Mounting the Switch on a Rack (GS1350-26HP)
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into
the rack.
Note: Make sure you tighten all the four screws to prevent the Switch from getting slanted.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
31
CHAPTER 3
Hardware Panels
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the
hardware connections.
3.1 Front Panel
The following figures show the front panels of the Switch.
Figure 10 Front Panel: GS1350-6HP
Figure 11 Front Panel: GS1350-12HP
Figure 12 Front Panel: GS1350-18HP
Figure 13 Front Panel: GS1350-26HP
3.1.1 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The Switch has 1000Base-T auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Ethernet ports. In 10/100/1000 Mbps
Gigabit, the speed can be 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex
or full duplex.
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (10/100/1000 Mbps)
and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port automatically works with a straight-through or crossover
Ethernet cable.
Four 1000Base-T Ethernet ports are paired with an SFP slot to create a dual personality interface. The
Switch uses up to one connection for each SFP and 1000Base-T Ethernet pair. The SFP slots have priority
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
32
over the Gigabit ports. This means that if an SFP slot and the corresponding GbE port are connected at
the same time, the GbE port will be disabled.
Note: The dual personality ports change to fiber mode directly when inserting the fiber
module.
When auto-negotiation is turned on, an Ethernet port negotiates with the peer automatically to
determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto-
negotiation or turns off this feature, the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal
on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the Switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, an Ethernet
port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to
make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect.
3.1.1.1 Default Ethernet Negotiation Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Gigabit ports on the Switch are:
• Speed: Auto
•Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: Off
• Link Aggregation: Disabled
3.1.1.2 Auto-crossover
All ports are auto-crossover, that is auto-MDIX ports (Media Dependent Interface Crossover), so you may
use either a straight-through Ethernet cable or crossover Ethernet cable for all Gigabit port connections.
Auto-crossover ports automatically sense whether they need to function as crossover or straight ports, so
crossover cables can connect both computers and switches/hubs.
3.1.2 PoE
The Switch supports the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE), IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet (PoE)
plus and IEEE 802.3bt standards. The Switch is a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) because it provides a
source of power via its Ethernet ports. Each device that receives power through an Ethernet port is a
Powered Device (PD).
3.1.3 SFP Slots
These are slots for SFP (Small Form-Factor Pluggable) transceivers. A transceiver is a single unit that
houses a transmitter and a receiver. The Switch does not come with transceivers. You must use
transceivers that comply with the Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Transceiver MultiSource Agreement
(MSA). See the SFF committee’s INF-8074i specification Rev 1.0 for details.
You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating. You can use different transceivers to
connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic or even copper cable connectors.
WARNING! To avoid possible eye injury, do not look into an operating
fiber-optic module’s connectors.
• Type: SFP connection interface
• Connection speed: 100/1000 Mbps per second
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
33
3.1.3.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install an SFP transceiver.
1Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
2Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
3The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning
properly.
4Close the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
5Connect the fiber optic cables to the transceiver.
Figure 14 Transceiver Installation Example
Figure 15 Connecting the Fiber Optic Cables
3.1.3.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove an SFP transceiver.
1Remove the fiber optic cables from the transceiver.
2Open the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
Note: Make sure the transceiver’s latch is pushed all the way down, so the transceiver can be
pulled out successfully.
3Pull the transceiver out of the slot.
Note: Do NOT pull the transceiver out by force. You could damage it.
Figure 16 Removing the Fiber Optic Cables
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
34
Figure 17 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example
Figure 18 Transceiver Removal Example
3.2 Rear Panel
The following figures show the rear panels of the Switch.
Figure 19 Rear Panel: GS1350-6HP
Figure 20 Rear Panel: GS1350-12HP
Figure 21 Rear Panel: GS1350-18HP
Figure 22 Rear Panel: GS1350-26HP
3.2.1 Grounding
Grounding is a safety measure to have unused electricity return to the ground. It prevents damage to
the Switch, and protects you from electrocution.
Any device that is located outdoors and connected to this product must be properly grounded and
surge protected. To the extent permissible by applicable law, failure to follow these guidelines could
result in damage to your Switch which may not be covered by it’s warranty.
Note: The Switch must be grounded by qualified service personnel.
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
35
Note: Qualified service personnel must confirm the building’s protective earthing terminal is a
valid terminal.
1Remove the M4 ground screw from the Switch’s rear panel.
2Secure a green/yellow ground cable (16 AWG or smaller) to the Switch's rear panel using the M4 ground
screw.
3Attach the other end of the cable to the ground, either to the same ground electrode as the rack you
installed the device on or to the main grounding electrode of the building.
Follow your country's regulations and safety instructions to electrically ground the device properly.
if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available, contact the appropriate electrical inspection
authority or an electrician.
Warning! Connect the ground cable before you connect any other
cables or wiring.
Figure 23 Grounding
3.2.2 Power Connection
Note: Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel and that no
objects obstruct the airflow of the fans (located on the side of the unit).
GS1350-6HP: Connect the supplied power adapter to the power receptacle on the rear panel. Then use
the included power cord to connect the power adapter to an appropriate power source. Set the
power switch to the ON position.
GS1350-12HP/18HP/26HP: To connect power to the Switch, insert the female end of the supplied power
cord to the AC power receptacle on the rear panel. Connect the other end of the power cord to an
appropriate power outlet.
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
36
3.2.3 4-Pin Console Port
This console port is for troubleshooting only. With instructions from customer support, connect the 4-pin
connector of the USB Type A console cable to the console port of the Switch. Then connect the other
end to a USB port on your computer. You can use a computer with terminal emulation software
configured to the following parameters:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 115200 bps
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control
3.3 LEDs
After you connect the power to the Switch, view the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch
and as an aid in troubleshooting.
Table 3 LED Descriptions
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR Green On The Switch is receiving power from the power module in the power slot.
Blinking The Switch is returning to the last-saved custom default configuration settings.
Amber On The Switch is returning to its factory default configuration settings.
Off The Switch is not receiving power from the power module in the power slot.
SYS Green On The Switch is on and functioning properly.
Blinking The Switch is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tests.
Red On The Switch is functioning abnormally.
Off The power is off or the Switch is not ready/malfunctioning.
CLOUD Green On The Switch has successfully connected to the NCC (Nebula Control Center).
Blinking The Switch cannot connect to the NCC because it is not registered.
Amber On The Switch is registered at NCC but cannot connect to the NCC. Please
check the Internet connection of the Switch.
Blinking The Switch is not registered at NCC and cannot connect to the NCC. Please
check the Internet connection of the Switch and register the Switch at NCC.
Off The Switch is operating in standalone mode. Nebula Control Center
Discovery is disabled in Basic > Cloud Management > Nebula Control Center
Discovery in the Switch Web Configurator.
LOCATOR Blue On The Switch is uploading firmware. While the Switch is doing this, don’t turn off
the power.
Blinking Shows the actual location of the Switch between several devices in a rack.
The default timer is 30 minutes when you are configuring the Switch.
Off The locator is not functioning or malfunctioning.
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
37
PoE Usage MAX
Bar1 is the bar at
the bottom; bar
5 is the bar at
the top.
Green
(Bar1-Bar3)
On Each bar represents 20% of PoE Power consumption.
Bar 1: PoE power usage is below 20 percent of the power supplied budget.
Bar 2: PoE power usage is below 40 percent of the power supplied budget,
but over 20 percent of the power supplied budget.
Bar 3: PoE power usage is below 60 percent of the power supplied budget,
but over 40 percent of the power supplied budget.
Yellow
(Bar4)
On PoE power usage is below 80 percent of the power supplied budget, but
over 60 percent of the power supplied budget.
Red
(Bar5)
On PoE power usage is more than 80 percent of the power supplied budget.
Blinking Less than 5 percent of the power supplied budget remains. 5 percent is the
default value.
Off PoE power usage is 0 percent of the power supplied budget.
Ethernet Ports and PoE
LNK/ACT
1-5 (GS1350-
6HP)
1-8 (GS1350-
12HP)
1-16 (GS1350-
18HP)
1-24 (GS1350-
26HP)
Green Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network.
On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Amber Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet
network.
On The link to a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Off The link to an Ethernet network is down.
PoE
1-5 (GS1350-
6HP)
1-8 (GS1350-
12HP)
1-16 (GS1350-
18HP)
1-24 (GS1350-
26HP)
Green On Power supplied to all PoE Ethernet ports meets the IEEE 802.3at/bt standard.
Amber On Power supplied to all PoE Ethernet ports meets the IEEE 802.3af standard.
Off There is no power supplied.
Dual Personality Interface
Ethernet Ports
17-18 (GS1350-
18HP)
25-26 (GS1350-
26HP)
Green Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network.
On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Amber Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet
network.
On The link to a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Off The link to an Ethernet network is down.
SFP Slots
17-18 (GS1350-
18HP)
25-26 (GS1350-
26HP)
Green On The uplink port is linking at 1000 Mbps.
Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving data 1000 Mbps.
Amber On The uplink port is linking at 100 Mbps.
Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving data 100 Mbps.
Off There is no link or port, the uplink port is shut down.
Table 3 LED Descriptions (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
38
10/100/1000Base-T Ethernet Ports
9-10 (GS1350-
12HP)
Green Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network.
On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Amber Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet
network.
On The link to a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Off The link to an Ethernet network is down.
1G SFP Slots
6 (GS1350-6HP)
11-12 (GS1350-
12HP)
Green On The uplink port is linking at 1000 Mbps.
Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving data 1000 Mbps.
Amber On The uplink port is linking at 100 Mbps.
Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving data 100 Mbps.
Off There is no link or port, the uplink port is shut down.
Table 3 LED Descriptions (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
39
PART II
Technical Reference
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
40
CHAPTER 4
The Web Configurator
4.1 Overview
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator.
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 9.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 21 and
later versions, Safari 6.0 and later versions or Google Chrome 26.0 and later versions. The recommended
screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
4.2 System Login
1Start your web browser.
2The Switch is a DHCP client by default. Type “http://DHCP-assigned IP” in the Location or Address field.
Press [ENTER].
If the Switch is not connected to a DHCP server, type “http://” and the static IP address of the Switch (for
example, the default management IP address is 192.168.1.1 through an in-band port) in the Location or
Address field. Press [ENTER]. Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website
address.
Also, you can use the ZON Utility to check your Switch’s IP address. See Section 4.3 on page 44 for more
information on the ZON utility.
3The following screen appears.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
41
Figure 24 Web Configurator: Login
4Click Login to log into the web configurator to manage the Switch directly. The default username is
admin and associated default password is 1234.
5The Wizard screen will appear after logging into the Switch. You can use the Wizard screen to configure
the Switch’s IP, login password, SNMP community, link aggregation, and so on. See Section 4.4 on page
48 for more information on the Wizard screen. When you finish configuring the settings, you can click the
Apply button to make the settings take effect. Check the screens to see if the settings are applied, and
click the Save button in the top to save your configuration into the Switch’s nonvolatile memory. You
can also just click the Apply & Save button to make the settings takes effect, and save your
configuration into the Switch’s nonvolatile memory at once.
Note: Once you click the Apply or Apply & Save button, the settings configured in the Wizard
screen will overwrite the existing settings.
Otherwise, click the Exit button. You can select the Ignore this wizard next time check box and click
Apply if you don’t want the Wizard screen to appear the next time you log in. If you want to open the
Wizard screen later, click the Wizard icon in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
42
Figure 25 Web Configurator: Wizard
6If you didn’t change the default administrator password and/or SNMP community values, a warning
screen displays each time you log into the web configurator. Click Password / SNMP to open a screen
where you can change the administrator and SNMP passwords simultaneously. Otherwise, click Ignore
to close it.
Figure 26 Web Configurator: Warning
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
43
Figure 27 Web Configurator: Password
Change the default administrator and/or SNMP passwords, and then click Apply to save your changes.
Table 4 Web Configurator: Password/SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default administrator
user name.
Old Password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
General Setting
Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community (password) values.
Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch. The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version
on the SNMP manager. Choose SNMP version 2c (v2c), SNMP version 3 (v3) or both (v3v2c).
Note: SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string, which is the password for the incoming Get- and GetNext-
requests from the management station.
The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Set Community Enter the Set Community string, which is the password for the incoming Set- requests from the
management station.
The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
manager.
The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
44
4.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility
ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It detects
devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without having to
be near it.
The ZON Utility issues requests via Zyxel Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query, the device
responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location, system and model
name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the ZON Utility screen and you
can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch firmware upgrade in it. You can
download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC.
4.3.1 Requirements
Before installing the ZON Utility on your PC, please make sure it meets the requirements listed below.
Operating System
At the time of writing, the ZON Utility is compatible with:
• Windows 7 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Windows 8 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Windows 8.1 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Window 10 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
Note: To check for your Windows operating system version, right-click on My Computer >
Properties. You should see this information in the General tab.
Hardware
Here are the minimum hardware requirements to use the ZON Utility on your PC.
• Core i3 processor
•2GB RAM
• 100MB free hard disk
• WXGA (Wide XGA 1280x800)
4.3.2 Run the ZON Utility
1Double-click the ZON Utility to run it.
2The first time you run the ZON Utility, you will see if your device and firmware version support the ZON
Utility. Click the OK button to close this screen.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
45
Figure 28 Supported Devices and Versions
If you want to check the supported models and firmware versions later, you can click the Show
information about ZON icon in the upper right hand corner of the screen. Then select the Supported
model and firmware version link. If your device is not listed here, see the device release notes for ZON
utility support. The release notes are in the firmware zip file on the Zyxel web site.
Figure 29 ZON Utility Screen
3Select a network adapter to which your supported devices are connected.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
46
Figure 30 Network Adapter
4Click the Go button for the ZON Utility to discover all supported devices in your network.
Figure 31 Discovery
5The ZON Utility screen shows the devices discovered.
Figure 32 ZON Utility Screen
6Select a device and then use the icons to perform actions. Some functions may not be available for
your devices.
Note: You must know the selected device admin password before taking actions on the
device using the ZON utility icons.
12345678910 11 12 13
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
47
Figure 33 Password Prompt
The following table describes the icons numbered from left to right in the ZON Utility screen.
The following table describes the fields in the ZON Utility main screen.
Table 5 ZON Utility Icons
ICON DESCRIPTION
1 IP configuration Change the selected device’s IP address.
2 Renew IP Address Update a DHCP-assigned dynamic IP address.
3 Reboot Device Use this icon to restart the selected device(s). This may be useful when troubleshooting
or upgrading new firmware.
4 Reset Configuration to
Default
Use this icon to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will
lose all previous configurations.
5 Locator LED Use this icon to locate the selected device by causing its Locator LED to blink.
6 Web GUI Use this to access the selected device web configurator from your browser. You will
need a username and password to log in.
7 Firmware Upgrade Use this icon to upgrade new firmware to selected device(s) of the same model. Make
sure you have downloaded the firmware from the Zyxel website to your computer and
unzipped it in advance.
8 Change Password Use this icon to change the admin password of the selected device. You must know
the current admin password before changing to a new one.
9 Configure NCC
Discovery
You must have Internet access to use this feature. Use this icon to enable or disable the
Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature on the selected device. If it’s
enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected
device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it’ll go into the Nebula cloud
management mode.
10 ZAC Use this icon to run the Zyxel AP Configurator of the selected AP.
11 Clear and Rescan Use this icon to clear the list and discover all devices on the connected network again.
12 Save Configuration Use this icon to save configuration changes to permanent memory on a selected
device.
13 Settings Use this icon to select a network adapter for the computer on which the ZON utility is
installed, and the utility language.
Table 6 ZON Utility Fields
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type This field displays an icon of the kind of device discovered.
Model This field displays the model name of the discovered device.
Firmware Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
48
4.4 Wizard
The Setup Wizard contains the following parts:
•Basic - to configure the Switch IP address, DNS server, system password, SNMP community and link
aggregation (trunking).
•Protection - to enable loop guard and broadcast storm control on the Switch and its ports.
•VLAN - to create a static VLAN, assign ports to the VLAN and set the ports to tag or untag outgoing
frames.
•QoS - to determine a port’s IEEE 802.1p priority level for QoS.
4.4.1 Basic
In Basic, you can set up IP/DNS, set up your password, SNMP community, link aggregation, and view
finished results.
In order to set up your IP/DNS, please do the following. Click Wizard > Basic > Step 1 IP to access this
screen.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device.
IP Address This field displays the IP address of an internal interface on the discovered device that
first received an ZDP discovery request from the ZON utility.
System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device.
Location This field displays where the discovered device is.
Status This field displays whether changes to the discovered device have been done
successfully. As the Switch does not support IP Config uration, Renew IP address and
Flash Locator LED, this field displays “Update failed”, “Not support Renew IP address”
and “Not support Flash Locator LED” respectively.
NCC Discovery This field displays if the discovered device supports the Nebula Control Center (NCC)
discovery feature. If it’s enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC.
Once the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it’ll go into
the Nebula cloud management mode.
Serial Number Enter the admin password of the discovered device to display its serial number.
Hardware Version This field displays the hardware version of the discovered device.
Table 6 ZON Utility Fields
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
49
Figure 34 Wizard > Basic > Step 1 IP
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the Password screen appears.
Table 7 Wizard > Basic > Step 1 IP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name This field displays a host name.
IP Interface Select DHCP Client if the Switch is connected to a router with the DHCP server enabled. You
then need to check the router for the IP address assigned to the Switch in order to access
the Switch’s web configurator again.
Select Static IP Address when the Switch is NOT connected to a router or you want to assign
it a fixed IP address.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID.
IP Address The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network.
IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address.
Default Gateway Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
DNS Server DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address
and vice versa. Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain
name instead of an IP address.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
50
Figure 35 Wizard > Basic > Step 2 Password
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 8 Wizard > Basic > Step 2 Password
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator's Password
Current password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New password Enter your new system password.
Confirm password Retype your new system password for confirmation
SNMP
SNMP Select Enabled to let the Switch act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to
manage and monitor the Switch through the network. Select Disabled to turn this feature
off.
Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch. The SNMP version on the Switch must match the
version on the SNMP manager. Choose SNMP version 2c (v2c), SNMP version 3 (v3) or both
(v3v2c).
Note: SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string, which is the password for the incoming Get- and
GetNextrequests from the management station.
The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Set Community Enter the Set Community string, which is the password for the incoming Set- requests from
the management station.
The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
manager.
The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
51
After clicking Next, the Link Aggregation screen appears.
Figure 36 Wizard > Basic > Step 3 Link Aggregation
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the Summary screen appears.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 9 Wizard > Basic > Step 3 Link Aggregation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link Aggregation
T1-Tx Click the arrows to add or delete icons located on the left to desired preference.
Select Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group.
Select LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 8 Wizard > Basic > Step 2 Password
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
52
Figure 37 Wizard > Basic > Step 4 Summary
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 10 Wizard > Basic > Step 4 Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Setup IP
Host Name This field displays a host name.
IP Interface This field displays whether the WAN interface is using a DHCP IP address or a static IP
address.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID.
IP Address The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network.
IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address.
Default Gateway Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
DNS Server DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address
and vice versa. Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain
name instead of an IP address.
Change administrator's password and activate SNMP
New Password This field displays asterisks when a new password has been created.
SNMP This field displays whether the Switch acts as an SNMP agent.
Version This field displays the SNMP version for the Switch.
Get Community This field displays the Get Community string.
Set Community This field displays the Set Community string.
Trap Community This field displays the Trap Community string.
Link Aggregation
Group This field displays the group number.
Type This field displays Static or LACP of this group.
Member This field displays the members of this group.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
53
4.4.2 Protection
In Protection, you can set up loop guard and broadcast storm control.
In order to set up loop guard, please do the following. Click Wizard > Protection > Step 1 Loop Guard to
access this screen.
Figure 38 Wizard > Protection > Step 1 Loop Guard
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the Broadcast Storm Control screen appears.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 10 Wizard > Basic > Step 4 Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 11 Wizard > Protection > Step 1 Loop Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Loop Guard
Select all ports Select all ports to enable the loop guard feature on all ports.
You can select a port by clicking it.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
54
Figure 39 Wizard > Protection > Step 2 Broadcast Storm Control
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the Summary screen appears.
Table 12 Wizard > Protection > Step 2 Broadcast Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Broadcast Storm Control
Select all ports Select all ports to apply settings on all ports.
You can select a port by clicking it.
Broadcast pkt/s Specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
55
Figure 40 Wizard > Protection > Step 3 Summary
Each field is described in the following table.
4.4.3 VLAN
In VLAN, you can create VLAN, and tag VLAN settings.
Click Wizard > VLAN > VLAN Setting to access this screen.
Table 13 Wizard > Protection > Step 3 Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Summary
Loop Guard If the loop guard feature is enabled on a port, the Switch will prevent loops on this port.
Broadcast Storm
Control
If the broadcast storm control feature is enabled on a port, the number of broadcast
packets the Switch receives per second will be limited on this port.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
56
Figure 41 Wizard > VLAN > VLAN Setting
Each field is described in the following table.
4.4.4 QoS
In QoS, you can create QoS settings.
In order to create QoS settings, please do the following. Click Wizard > QoS > QoS Setting to access this
screen.
Table 14 Wizard > VLAN > VLAN Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Setting
Default VLAN 1 /
Access Untagged
port
After you create a VLAN and select the VLAN ID from the drop-down list box, select ports
and use the right arrow to add them as the untagged ports to a VLAN group.
VLAN member port
VLAN Type a number between 2 and 4094 to create a VLAN.
Trunk Tagged port Select ports and use the downward arrow to add them as the tagged ports to the VLAN
group(s) you created.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
57
Figure 42 Wizard > QoS > QoS Setting
Each field is described in the following table.
4.5 Web Configurator Layout
This guide uses GS1350-6HP screens as an example. The screens may very slightly for different models.
The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen.
Table 15 Wizard > QoS > QoS Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Setting
Select all ports Select all ports to apply settings on all ports.
You can select a port by clicking it.
High Select ports and click the High button, so they will have high priority.
The port’s IEEE 802.1p priority level will be set to 5. Use the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen to
adjust the value.
Medium Select ports and click the Medium button and, so they will have medium priority.
The port’s IEEE 802.1p priority level will be set to 3. Use the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen to
adjust the value.
Low Select ports and click the Low button, so they will have low priority.
The port’s IEEE 802.1p priority level will be set to 1. Use the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen to
adjust the value.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
58
Figure 43 Web Configurator Home Screen (Status)
A - Click the menu items to open submenu links, and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in
the main window.
B, C, D, E, F, G - These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen
you are currently working in.
B - Click this link to update the information in the screen you are viewing currently.
C - Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch’s nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory is
the configuration of your Switch that stays the same even if the Switch’s power is turned off.
D - Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch.
E - Click this icon to open the wizard screen where you can configure the Switch’s IP, login password,
SNMP community, link aggregation, and so on.
F - Click this link to log out of the web configurator.
G - Click this link to display web help pages. The help pages provide descriptions for all of the
configuration screens.
H - Click this link to go to the Neighbor screen where you can see and manage neighbor devices
learned by the Switch.
A
B CD E F G
H
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
59
In the navigation panel, click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links.
The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 16 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview
BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT
Table 17 Navigation Panel Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
Basic Settings
System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system information.
General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information
about the Switch.
Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN
type and priority queues.
IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address and subnet mask
(necessary for Switch management) and set up to 64 IP routing domains.
Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports.
PoE Setup For PoE model(s).
This link takes you to a screen where you can set priorities, PoE power-up settings and schedule
so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Interface Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual interface type
and ID.
IPv6 This link takes you to a screen where you can view IPv6 status and configure IPv6 settings.
DNS This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DNS (domain name server) IP
addresses.
Cloud
Management
This screen displays a link to a screen where you can enable or disable the Nebula Control
Center Discovery feature. If it’s enabled, you can have the Switch search for the NCC (Nebula
Control Center). Another link takes you to the Nebula Switch Registration screen which has a
QR code containing the Switch’s serial number and MAC address for handy registration of the
Switch at NCC.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
60
Advanced Application
VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port-based or 802.1Q VLAN (depending
on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu). You can also configure a voice VLAN, a
MAC based VLAN or a vendor ID based VLAN in these screens.
Static MAC
Forwarding
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port. These
static MAC addresses do not age out.
Static Multicast
Forwarding
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC addresses for
port(s). These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out.
Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.
Spanning Tree
Protocol
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP to prevent network loops.
Bandwidth
Control
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure bandwidth limits on the Switch.
Broadcast Storm
Control
This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters.
Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port
in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference.
Link Aggregation This link takes you to screens where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one
logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Time Range This link takes you to a screen where you can define different schedules.
Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue
weights for each port.
Multicast This link takes you to screens where you can configure various multicast features and IGMP
snooping.
AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication, authorization and
accounting services via external servers. The external servers should be RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service).
DHCP Snooping This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP packets in
your network.
Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that
occur on the edge of your network.
Errdisable This link takes you to screens where you can view errdisable status and configure errdisable
settings in CPU protection, errdisable detect, and errdisable recovery.
Green Ethernet This link takes you to a screen where you can configure green Ethernet settings in EEE, auto
power down, and short reach for each port.
LLDP This link takes you to screens where you can configure LLDP settings.
Auto PD
Recovery
This link takes you to a screen where you can enable and configure Auto PD Recovery on the
Switch.
IP Application
DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ, configure marking rules and set
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mappings.
DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings.
ARP Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure the ARP learning settings for each port.
Management
Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file
maintenance as well as reboot the system.
Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure
SNMP and remote management.
Table 17 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
61
4.5.1 Change Your Password
After you log in for the first time, it is recommended you change the default administrator password.
Click Management > Access Control > Logins to display the next screen.
Figure 44 Change Administrator Login Password
Diagnostic This link takes you to a screen where you can ping IP addresses, run traceroute, test port(s) and
show the Switch’s location.
System Log This link takes you to a screen where you can view system logs.
Syslog Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can setup system logs and a system log server.
Cluster
Management
This link takes you to screens where you can configure clustering management and view its
status.
MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses (and types) of devices
attached to what ports and VLAN IDs.
ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses – IP address resolution
table.
Path MTU Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the path MTU aging time, index, destination
address, MTU, and expire settings.
Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to other ports.
IPv6 Neighbor
Table
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IPv6 neighbor table which includes
index, interface, neighbor address, MAC address, status and type.
Port Status This link takes you to a screen where you can view the port statistics.
Table 17 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
62
4.6 Save Your Configuration
When you are done modifying the settings in a screen, click Apply to save your changes back to the
run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the Switch’s power is turned off.
Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to
nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch’s storage that remains even if the Switch’s
power is turned off.
Note: Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session.
4.7 Switch Lockout
You could block yourself (and all others) from managing the Switch if you do one of the following:
1Delete the management VLAN (default is VLAN 1).
2Delete all port-based VLANs with the CPU port as a member. The “CPU port” is the management port of
the Switch.
3Filter all traffic to the CPU port.
4Disable all ports.
5Misconfigure the text configuration file.
6Forget the password and/or IP address.
7Prevent all services from accessing the Switch.
8Change a service port number but forget it.
Note: Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch.
4.8 Reset the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) from the Switch or forget the administrator password, you will need to
reload the factory-default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults.
4.8.1 The Restore Button
Press the RESTORE button for more than seven seconds to have the Switch automatically reboot and
restore the factory default file. See Section 3.3 on page 36 for more information about the LED behavior.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
63
4.8.2 Restore Custom Default
Press the RESTORE button for three to seven seconds to have the Switch automatically reboot and
restore the last-saved custom default file. See Section 3.3 on page 36 for more information about the
LED behavior.
4.8.3 Reboot the Switch
Press the RESET button to reboot the Switch without turning the power off. See Section 3.3 on page 36 for
more information about the LED behavior.
4.9 Log Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password again after
you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons.
Figure 45 Web Configurator: Logout Screen
4.10 Help
The web configurator’s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary
information.
Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
64
CHAPTER 5
Initial Setup Example
5.1 Overview
This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network.
The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup:
•Create a VLAN
•Set Port VID
•Configure Switch Management IP Address
5.1.1 Create a VLAN
VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port(s) belongs. You can do this with
port-based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members.
In this example, you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2.
Figure 46 Initial Setup Network Example: VLAN
1Click Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration in the navigation panel and click the Static
VLAN Setup link.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
65
2In the Static VLAN
screen, select ACTIVE,
enter a descriptive
name in the Name field
and enter 2 in the VLAN
Group ID field for the
VLAN2 network.
Note: The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the
same VLAN ID.
3Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch, select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a
permanent member of the VLAN only.
4To ensure that VLAN-unaware devices (such as computers and hubs) can receive frames properly, clear
the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending.
5Click Add to save the settings to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the
Switch’s power is turned off.
5.1.2 Set Port VID
Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are
forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
In the example network, configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on
that port get sent to VLAN 2.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
66
Figure 47 Initial Setup Network Example: Port VID
1Click Advanced Applications
> VLAN > VLAN Configuration
in the navigation panel. Then
click the VLAN Port Setup link.
2Enter 2 in the PVID field for
port 1 and click Apply to save
your changes back to the
run-time memory. Settings in
the run-time memory are lost
when the Switch’s power is
turned off.
5.1.3 Configure Switch Management IP Address
If the Switch fails to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server, the Switch will use 192.168.1.1 as the
management IP address. You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management
purposes. The following figure shows an example.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
67
Figure 48 Initial Setup Example: Management IP Address
1Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch. Make sure your computer is in the same
subnet as the Switch.
2Open your web browser and enter 192.168.1.1 (the default IP address) in the address bar to access the
web configurator. See Section 4.2 on page 40 for more information.
3Click Basic Setting > IP Setup in the
navigation panel.
4Configure the related fields in the IP
Setup screen.
5For the VLAN2 network, enter
192.168.2.1 as the IP address and
255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask.
6In the VID field, enter the ID of the
VLAN group to which you want this
management IP address to belong.
This is the same as the VLAN ID you
configure in the Static VLAN screen.
7Click Add to save your changes back
to the run-time memory. Settings in the
run-time memory are lost when the Switch’s power is turned off.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
68
CHAPTER 6
Tutorials
6.1 Overview
This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch. The
tutorials include:
•How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch
•How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch
6.2 How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch
You only want DHCP server A connected to port 4 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN network
(V). Create a VLAN containing ports 4, 5 and 6. Connect a computer M to the Switch for management.
Figure 49 Tutorial: DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview
Note: For related information about DHCP snooping, see Section 22.2 on page 171.
The settings in this tutorial are as the following.
1Access the Switch through http://192.168.1.1 by default. Log into the Switch by entering the username
(default: admin) and password (default: 1234).
Table 18 Tutorial: Settings in this Tutorial
HOST PORT CONNECTED VLAN PVID DHCP SNOOPING PORT TRUSTED
DHCP Server (A) 4 1 and 100 100 Yes
DHCP Client (B) 5 1 and 100 100 No
DHCP Client (C) 6 1 and 100 100 No
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
69
2Go to Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup, and create a VLAN with
ID of 100. Add ports 4, 5 and 6 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown.
Deselect Tx Tagging because you don’t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag.
Click Add.
Figure 50 Tutorial: Create a VLAN and Add Ports to It
3Go to Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup, and set the PVID of the
ports 4, 5 and 6 to 100. This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 4, 5 and 6 with the tag 100.
Figure 51 Tutorial: Tag Untagged Frames
4Go to Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure, activate and specify VLAN 100 as the
DHCP VLAN as shown. Click Apply.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
70
Figure 52 Tutorial: Specify DHCP VLAN
5Click the Port link at the top right corner.
6The DH CP Snooping Port Configure screen appears. Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port
4 because the DHCP server is connected to port 4. Keep ports 5 and 6 Untrusted because they are
connected to DHCP clients. Click Apply.
Figure 53 Tutorial: Set the DHCP Server Port to Trusted
7Go to Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN, show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in
the VLAN Search by VID field and click Search. Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry
shown at the bottom section of the screen.
If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system
name, you can also select an Option82 Profile in the entry. See Section 22.4.1.3 on page 180.
Figure 54 Tutorial: Enable DHCP Snooping on this VLAN
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
71
8Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to
save the configuration permanently.
9Connect your DHCP server to port 4 and a computer (as DHCP client) to either port 5 or 6. The computer
should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server. If you put the DHCP server on port 5 or 6, the
computer will not able to get an IP address.
10 To check if DHCP snooping works, connect to the Switch via Telnet. Use the command “show dhcp
snooping binding” to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next.
6.3 How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch
This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP
server. The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP
requests.
6.3.1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction
In this example, you have configured your DHCP server (192.168.2.3) and want to have it assign a
specific IP address (say 172.16.1.18) to DHCP client A based on the system name, VLAN ID and port
number in the DHCP request. Client A connects to the Switch’s port 2 in VLAN 102.
Figure 55 Tutorial: DHCP Relay Scenario
6.3.2 Create a VLAN
Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102.
sysname# show dhcp snooping binding
MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port
----------------- --------------- ------------ ------------- ---- -----
00:02:00:00:00:1c 10.10.1.16 6d23h59m20s dhcp-snooping 100 5
Total number of bindings: 1
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
72
1Access the web configurator through the Switch’s management port.
2Go to Basic Setting > Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802.1Q. Click Apply to save the settings to
the run-time memory.
Figure 56 Tutorial: Set VLAN Type to 802.1Q
3Click Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup.
4In the Static VLAN screen, select ACTIVE, enter a descriptive name (VLAN 102 for example) in the Name
field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field.
5Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN.
6Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending.
7Click Add to save the settings to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the
Switch’s power is turned off.
Figure 57 Tutorial: Create a Static VLAN
8Click the VLAN Configuration link in the Static VLAN Setup screen and then the VLAN Port Setup link in the
VLAN Configuration screen.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
73
Figure 58 Tutorial: Click the VLAN Port Setting Link
9Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so
that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory.
Figure 59 Tutorial: Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2
11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration
permanently.
6.3.3 Configure DHCPv4 Relay
Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent
information (such as the VLAN ID) to DHCP requests.
1Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen.
2Select the Active check box.
3Enter the DHCP server’s IP address (192.168.2.3 in this example) in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field.
4Select default1 or default2 in the Option 82 Profile field.
5Click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
74
Figure 60 Tutorial: Set DHCP Server and Relay Information
6Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration
permanently.
7The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request.
6.3.4 Troubleshooting
Check the client A’s IP address. If it did not receive the IP address 172.16.1.18, make sure:
1Client A is connected to the Switch’s port 2 in VLAN 102.
2You configured the correct VLAN ID, port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP
server and the Switch.
3You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
75
CHAPTER 7
Status
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the screens for System Status, and Neighbor Details.
7.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Status screen (Section 7.2 on page 75) to see the Switch’s general device information, system
status, and IP addresses. You can also display other status screens for more information.
• Use the Neighbor screen (Section 7.2.1 on page 77) to view and manage Switch’s neighbor devices.
7.2 Status
The Status screen displays when you log into the Switch or click Status at the top right corner of the web
configurator. The Status screen displays general device information, system status, and its IP addresses.
Chapter 7 Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
76
Figure 61 Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Device Information
Device Type This field displays the model name of this Switch.
System Name This field displays the name used to identify the Switch on any network.
Boot Version This field displays the version number and date of the boot module that is currently on the
Switch.
System Location This field displays the geographic location of your Switch. You can change the setting in the
Basic Setting > General Setup screen.
Firmware
Version
This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the Switch is currently running.
System Time This field displays the current date and time in the UAG. The format is mm-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss.
Hardware
Version
This field displays the hardware version number of the Switch. The integer is the model version,
and the decimal is the version of the hardware change. For example, V1.0 is a hardware version
for the Switch where 1 identifies the GS1350 Series, and .0 is the first hardware change.
System Up Time This field displays how long the Switch has been running since it last restarted or was turned on.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC addresses of the Switch.
Login
Timeout(mins)
This field displays how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session
times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again.
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this Switch. The serial number is used for device tracking
and control.
Chapter 7 Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
77
7.2.1 Neighbor Screen
The neighbor screen allows you to view and manage the Switch’s neighboring devices more
conveniently. It uses Layer Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP) to discover all neighbor devices connected to
the Switch including non-Zyxel devices. You can perform tasks on the neighboring devices like login,
reboot (turn the power off and then back on again), and reset to factory default settings in the
Neighbor screen. For more information on LLDP, see (Section 26.1 on page 194).
This screen shows the neighboring device first recognized on an Ethernet port of the Switch. Device
information is displayed in gray when the neighboring device is offline.
Click Status > Neighbor to see the following screen.
Registration
MAC Address
This field displays the MAC address of the Switch that you must use to register at myZyxel.com or
the NCC (Nebula Control Center).
Hybrid Mode This field displays whether the Switch is in Standalone mode or Cloud mode. In Standalone mode
you can see a link to a QR code to register the Switch to use NCC (Nebula Control Center).
Cloud Control
Status
This field displays the registration and connection status between the Switch and the NCC
(Nebula Control Center). See Section 3.3 on page 36 for more information on the Cloud LED.
In Standalone mode, the status will display Disconnected or Unregistered. In cloud mode the
status will display Connected or Disconnected.
Connected - The Switch is registered with and connected to the NCC.
Disconnected - The Switch is not connected to the NCC.
Unregistered - The Switch is not registered with the NCC.
PoE Usage This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the connected PoE-
enabled devices and the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PDs. It also
shows the percentage of PoE power usage.
When PoE usage reaches 100%, the Switch will shut down PDs one-by-one according to the PD
priority which you configured in Basic Setting > PoE Setup.
Detail Click this link to go to the Basic Setting > System Info screen to check other detailed information,
such as system resource usage and the Switch temperature, fan speeds or voltage.
IP Address Information
IPv4 Address This field displays the Switch’s current IPv4 address.
Subnet Mask This field displays the Switch’s subnet mask.
Default
Gateway
This field displays the IP address of the Switch’s default gateway.
IP Setup Click the link to go to the Basic Setting > IP Setup screen.
IPV6 Global
Unicast Address
This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 global unicast address
IPV6 Link-Local
Address
This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 link-local address.
IPv6
configuration
Click the link to go to the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen.
Device Status
and Quick
Configuration
This section shows whether a feature is enabled or not on the Switch. You can click a feature’s
Setting link to go to the configuration screen for the feature.
Hover your cursor over a red exclamation mark to display information about the feature.
Quick Links This section provides the shortcut link to a specific configuration screen.
Table 19 Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
78
Figure 62 Status > Neighbor
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 20 Status > Neighbor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This shows the port of the Switch, on which the neighboring device is discovered.
Port Name This shows the port description of the Switch.
PD Health This shows the status of auto PD recovery on this port. See Section 27.2 on page 216 for
more information on how to enable auto PD recovery on the Switch and ports.
• Red: The Switch failed to get information from the PD connected to the port using LLDP,
or the connected PD didn’t respond to the Switch’s ping requests.
• Yellow: The Switch is restarting the connected PD by turning the power off and turning it
on again.
• Green: The Switch successfully discovered the connected PD using LLDP or ping.
•--: Auto PD Recovery is not enabled on the Switch and the port, or the Switch doesn’t
supply power to the connected PD.
Link This shows the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps, or 1G for 1 Gbps) and the
duplex (F for full duplex or H for half). This field displays Down if the port is not connected to
any device.
PoE Draw (W) This shows the consumption that the neighboring device connected to this port draws from
the Switch. This allows you to plan and use within the power budget of the Switch.
System Name This shows the system name of the neighbor device.
IP This shows the IP address of the neighbor device. The IP address is a hyper link that you can
click to log into and manage the neighbor device through its web configurator.
PWR Cycle Click the Cycle button to turn OFF the power of the neighbor device and turn it back ON
again. A count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note: The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a
powered device (PD).
Reset to Default Click the Reset button to reset the neighboring device to its factory default settings. A
warning message “Are you sure you want to load factory default?” appears prompting you
to confirm the action. After confirming the action a count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note:
• The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a powered
device (PD).
• If multiple neighbor devices use the same port, the Reset button is not available.
• You can only reset Zyxel powered devices that support the ZON utility.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific port. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all ports.
Flush Click the Flush button to remove information about neighbors learned on the selected
ports.
Chapter 7 Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
79
7.2.2 Neighbor Detail
Use this screen to view detailed information about the neighboring devices. Device information is
displayed in gray when the neighboring device is currently offline.
Up to 10 neighboring device records per Ethernet port can be retained in this screen even when the
devices are offline. When the maximum number of neighboring device records per Ethernet port is
reached, new device records automatically overwrite existing offline device records, starting with the
oldest existing offline device record first.
Click the Neighbor Detail link in the Status > Neighbor screen to see the following screen.
Figure 63 Status > Neighbor > Neighbor Detail
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 21 Status > Neighbor > Neighbor Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Port This shows the port of the Switch, on which the neighboring device is discovered.
Desc. This shows the port description of the Switch.
PD Health This shows the status of auto PD recovery on this port.
• Red: The Switch failed to get information from the PD connected to the port using
LLDP, or the connected PD didn’t respond to the Switch’s ping requests.
• Yellow: The Switch is restarting the connected PD by turning the power off and
turning it on again.
• Green: The Switch successfully discovered the connected PD using LLDP or ping.
•--: Auto PD Recovery is not enabled on the Switch and the port, or the Switch doesn’t
supply power to the connected PD.
Link This shows the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps, or 1G for 1 Gbps) and
the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half). This field displays Down if the port is not
connected to any device.
PoE Draw (W) This shows the consumption that the neighboring device connected to this port draws
from the Switch. This allows you to plan and use within the power budget of the Switch.
PWR Cycle Click the Cycle button to turn OFF the power of the neighbor device and turn it back ON
again. A count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note: The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a
powered device (PD).
Remote
System Name This shows the system name of the neighbor device.
Chapter 7 Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
80
Model This shows the model name of the neighbor device. This field will show “--” for devices
that do not support the ZON utility.
Firmware This shows the firmware version of the neighbor device. This field will show “--” for devices
that do not support the ZON utility.
IP This shows the IP address of the neighbor device. The IP address is a hyper link that you
can click to log into and manage the neighbor device through its web configurator.
Port This show the number of the neighbor device’s port which is connected to the Switch.
Desc. This shows the description of the neighbor device’s port which is connected to the
Switch.
Location This shows the geographic location of the neighbor device. This field will show “--” for
devices that do not support the ZON utility.
MAC This shows the MAC address of the neighbor device.
Reset to Default Click the Reset button to reset the neighbor device to its factory default settings. A
warning message “Are you sure you want to load factory default?” appears prompting
you to confirm the action. After confirming the action a count down button (from 5 to 0)
starts.
Note:
• The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a powered
device (PD).
• If multiple neighbor devices use the same port, the Reset button is not available.
• You can only reset Zyxel powered devices that support the ZON utility.
Table 21 Status > Neighbor > Neighbor Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
81
CHAPTER 8
Basic Setting
8.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the System Info, General Setup, Switch Setup, IP Setup, Port
Setup, PoE Setup, Interface Setup, IPv6, DNS and Cloud Management screens.
8.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the System Info screen (Section 8.2 on page 81) to check the firmware version number and
monitor the Switch temperature.
• Use the General Setup screen (Section 8.3 on page 83) to configure general settings such as the
system name and time.
• Use the Switch Setup screen (Section 8.5 on page 85) to choose your VLAN type and assign priorities
to queues.
• Use the IP Setup screen (Section 8.6 on page 86) to configure the Switch IP address, default gateway
device, and the management VLAN ID.
• Use the Port Setup screen (Section 8.7 on page 88) to configure Switch port settings.
• Use the PoE Setup screens (Section 8.8 on page 90) to view the current amount of power that PDs are
receiving from the Switch and set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power to PDs. This
screen is available for PoE model(s) only.
• Use the Interface Setup screens (Section 8.9 on page 95) to configure Switch interface type and
interface ID settings.
• Use the IPv6 screens (Section 8.10 on page 96) to view IPv6 status and IPv6 configuration.
• Use the DNS screen (Section 8.11 on page 106) to configure the default domain name server.
• Use the Cloud Management screen (Section 8.12 on page 106) to display links to Nebula Control
Center Discovery and Nebula Switch Registration screens.
8.2 System Information
In the navigation panel, click Basic Setting > System Info to display the screen as shown. Use this screen
to view general system information. You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch
temperature.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
82
Figure 64 Basic Setting > System Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Basic Setting > System Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes.
Product Model This field displays the product model of the Switch. Use this information when searching for
firmware upgrade or looking for other support information in the website.
ZyNOS F/W
Version
This field displays the version number of the Switch 's current firmware including the date created.
Ethernet
Address
This field refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) address of the Switch.
CPU Utilization CPU utilization quantifies how busy the system is. Current (%) displays the current percentage of
CPU utilization.
Memory
Utilization
Memory utilization shows how much DRAM memory is available and in use. It also displays the
current percentage of memory utilization.
Name This field displays the name of memory pool.
Total (byte) This field displays the total number of bytes in this memory pool.
Used (byte) This field displays the number of bytes being used in this memory pool.
Utilization
(%) This field displays the percentage (%) of memory being used in this memory pool.
Hardware Monitor
Temperature
Unit
The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the
temperature rises above the threshold. You may choose the temperature unit (Centigrade or
Fahrenheit) in this field.
Temperature
(C)
CPU/MAC refers to the location of the temperature sensor on the Switch printed circuit board.
Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor.
MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.
MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.
Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor.
Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
83
8.3 General Setup
Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time. Click Basic Setting >
General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 65 Basic Setting > General Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Basic Setting > General Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to 64 printable
characters; spaces are allowed.
Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch. You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters;
spaces are allowed.
Contact Person's
Name
Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch. You can use up to 32 printable ASCII
characters; spaces are allowed.
Use Time Server
when Bootup
Enter the time service protocol that your time server uses. Not all time servers support all
protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main
differences between them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the Switch displays the day, month, year and
time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is recommended that you use a
Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/
1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868).
None is the default value. Enter the time manually. Each time you turn on the Switch, the time
and date will be reset to 1970-1-1 0:0:0.
Time Server IP
Address
Enter the IP address or domain name of your timeserver. The Switch searches for the timeserver
for up to 60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then this screen will appear
locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.
Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
84
8.4 Introduction to VLANs
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user
in the same building.
New Time
(hh:min:ss)
Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. The new time then appears in the
Current Time field after you click Apply.
Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu.
New Date (yyyy-
mm-dd)
Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in the Current
Date field after you click Apply.
Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly known as GMT,
Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone from the drop-down list box.
Daylight Saving
Time
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks
ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving
Time. The time is displayed in the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March.
Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in
the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and 2:00.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time
zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT
or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March and the last field
depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2:00 because
Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving
Time. The time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time
zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United
States you would select First, Sunday, November and 2:00.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time
zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT
or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October and the last field
depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2:00 because
Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 23 Basic Setting > General Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
85
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable
logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and
every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
Note: VLAN is unidirectional; it only governs outgoing traffic.
See Chapter 9 on page 109 for information on port-based and 802.1Q tagged VLANs.
8.5 Switch Setup
Click Basic Setting > Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. The VLAN
setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802.1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in
this screen. Refer to Chapter 9 on page 109 for more information on VLAN.
Figure 66 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type Choose 802.1Q or Port Based. The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you
choose 802.1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen. See Chapter 9 on page 109
for more information.
MAC Address Learning
MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts. For MAC address learning to occur on a port, the port
must be active.
Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long all dynamically learned MAC
addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be relearned).
ARP Aging Time
Aging Time Enter a time from 60 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long dynamically learned ARP entries
remain in the ARP table before they age out (and must be relearned). The setting here applies
to ARP entries which are newly added in the ARP table after you click Apply.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
86
8.6 IP Setup
Use the IP Setup screen to configure the Switch IP address, default gateway device, and the
management VLAN ID. The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway (next hop)
for outgoing traffic.
8.6.1 Management IP Addresses
The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. When the Switch fails to obtain
an IP address from a DHCP server, the static IP address 192.168.1.1 will be automatically added and
used as the Switch’s management IP address.
You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the
ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s).
Note: You must configure a VLAN first. Each VLAN can only have one management IP
address.
Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to
define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port. Use
the next fields to configure the priority level-to-physical queue mapping.
The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels. On the Switch, traffic assigned to
higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Priority Level (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which
incorporates the 802.1p).
Priority 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Priority 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).
Priority 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Priority 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network
Architecture) transactions.
Priority 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important
business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Priority 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Priority 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed
but that should not affect other applications and users.
Priority 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Table 24 Basic Setting > Switch Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
87
Figure 67 Basic Setting > IP Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Basic Setting > IP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Management IP Address
DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address,
subnet mask, a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address
automatically.
Static IP Address Select this option if you don’t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address
information to the Switch. You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192.168.1.1.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address. This is the VLAN
ID of the CPU and is used for management only. The default is "1". All ports, by default, are
fixed members of this "management VLAN" in order to manage the device from any port. If
a port is not a member of this VLAN, then users on that port cannot access the device. To
access the Switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of
Management VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
88
8.7 Port Setup
Use this screen to configure Switch port settings. Click Basic Setting > Port Setup in the navigation panel
to display the configuration screen.
Figure 68 Basic Setting > Port Setup
Management IP Addresses
You can create up to 64 IP addresses, which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging
to the pre-defined VLAN(s). You must configure a VLAN first.
IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the
VID field below.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation.
Add Click Add to insert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the
Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so
use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile
memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
IP Address This field displays the IP address.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Delete Check the management IP addresses that you want to remove in the Delete column, then
click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column.
Table 25 Basic Setting > IP Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
89
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Basic Setting > Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This is the port index number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port must be
enabled for data transmission to occur.
Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port. You can enter up to 64 alpha-numerical
characters.
Note: Due to space limitation, the port name may be truncated in some web
configurator screens.
Speed/Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port. Choices are
Auto, 10M/Half Duplex , 10M/Full Duplex, 100M/Half Duplex, 100M/Fu ll Duplex and 1G/Full Duplex
(Gigabit connections only).
Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to
obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support. When auto-negotiation
is turned on, a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the
connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port does not support auto-negotiation or turns
off this feature, the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the
cable and using half duplex mode. When the Switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses
the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to
make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect.
Extended
Range
Select this check box to extend the PoE range up to 250 meters.
After you enable this feature, the port will transfer data at a rate up to10 Mbps in full duplex
mode. If a PD is connected to the port, the Switch follows the IEEE 802.3at PoE+ standard to
supply power to the connected PD during power-up.
Note: Maximum PoE power that can be supplied to a PD at 250 m is 15 W.
Note: If you enable extended range on a port after the connected PD starts up
completely, you must disable PoE and enable it again or disconnect and
reconnect the cable to the port for extended mode to take effect.
Note: The port speed and duplex mode you previously configured will be applied
automatically when the extend range feature is disabled.
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory
causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals
to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The Switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half
duplex mode.
IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port,
causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the
sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop
sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to enable it.
802.1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority queue tag. See Priority
Queue Assignment in Table 24 on page 85 for more information.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
90
8.8 PoE Status
A powered device (PD) is a device such as an access point or a switch, that supports PoE (Power over
Ethernet) so that it can receive power from another device through an Ethernet port.
In the figure below, the IP camera and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch. Aside from
minimizing the need for cables and wires, PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a nearby electric
outlet to power up devices.
Figure 69 Powered Device Examples
You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Note: The PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their
connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors.
To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch, click Basic Setting > PoE
Setup.
Figure 70 Basic Setting > PoE Status
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 26 Basic Setting > Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
91
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Basic Setting > PoE Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch, whether it is in
Classification or Consumption mode.
Total Power (W) This field displays the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PoE-enabled
devices on the PoE ports.
Usage (%) This field displays the amount of power currently being supplied to connected PoE devices (PDs)
as a percentage of the total PoE power the Switch can supply.
When PoE usage reaches 100%, the Switch will shut down PDs one-by-one according to the PD
priority which you configured in Basic Setting > PoE setup.
Consuming
Power (W)
This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the connected PoE-
enabled devices.
Allocated Power
(W)
This field displays the total amount of power the Switch (in classification mode) has reserved for
PoE after negotiating with the connected PoE device(s). It shows NA when the Switch is in
consumption mode.
Consuming Power (W) can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated Power (W).
Remaining
Power (W)
This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE.
Note: The Switch must have at least 16 W of remaining power in order to supply
power to a PoE device, even if the PoE device needs less than 16W.
Port This is the port index number.
State This field shows which ports can receive power from the Switch. You can set this in Section 8.8.2
on page 93.
•Disable - The PD connected to this port cannot get power supply.
•Enable - The PD connected to this port can receive power.
Class This shows the power classification of the PD. Each PD has a specified maximum power that fall
under one of the classes.
The Class is a number from 0 to 6, where each value represents the range of power that the
Switch provides to the PD. The power ranges in PoE standards are as follows.
•Class 0 - default: 0.44 W to 15.4 W.
•Class 1 - default: 0.44 W to 4 W.
•Class 2 - default: 0.44 W to 7 W.
•Class 3 - default: 0.44 W to 15.4 W.
•Class 4 - default: 0.44 W to 30 W.
•Class 5 - default: 0.44 W to 45 W.
•Class 6 - default: 0.44 W to 60 W.
Note: You can extend or set a limit on the maximum power the connected PD can
use on a port in Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Setup.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch,
you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority first.
•Critical has the highest priority.
•High has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical priority ports are served.
•Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are
served.
Power-Up This field displays the PoE standard the Switch uses to provide power on this port.
Consuming
Power (W)
This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch on this port.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
92
8.8.1 PoE Time Range Setup
Use this screen to apply a schedule to the port(s) on the Switch. You must first configure a schedule in
the Advanced Application > Time Range screen.
Click the PoE Time Range Setup link in the Basic Setting > PoE Status screen. The following screen opens.
Figure 71 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Max Power (W) This field displays the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port.
Time-Range
State
This field shows whether or not the port currently receives power from the Switch according to its
schedule.
• It shows “In” followed by the time range name if PoE is currently enabled on the port.
• It shows “Out” if PoE is currently disabled on the port.
• It shows “-” if no schedule is applied to the port. PoE is enabled by default.
Table 27 Basic Setting > PoE Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 28 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the number of the port to which you want to apply a schedule.
Time Range This field displays the name of the schedule that you have created using the Advanced
Application > Time Range screen.
Select a pre-defined schedule to control when the Switch enables PoE to provide power on the
port. To select more than one schedule, press [SHIFT] and select the choices at the same time.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
93
8.8.2 PoE Se tup
Use this screen to set the PoE power management mode, priority levels, power-up mode and the
maximum amount of power for the connected PDs.
Click the PoE Setup link in the Basic Setting > PoE Status screen. The following screen opens.
Figure 72 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Port This field displays the index number of the port. Click a port number to change the schedule
settings.
Time Range
Profiles
This field displays the name of the schedule which is applied to the port.
PoE is enabled at the specified time/date.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check box(es).
Table 28 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 29 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use.
•Classification - Select this if you want the Switch to reserve the maximum power for each PD
according to the PD’s power class and priority level. If the total power supply runs out, PDs
with lower priority do not get power to function. In this mode, the maximum power is reserved
based on what you configure in Max Power or the standard power limit for each class.
•Consumption - Select this if you want the Switch to supply the actual power that the PD
needs. The Switch also allocates power based on a port’s M ax Power and the PD’s power
class and priority level. The Switch puts a limit on the maximum amount of power the PD can
request and use. In this mode, the default maximum power that can be delivered to the PD is
33 W (IEEE 802.3at Class 4) or 22 W (IEEE 802.3af Classes 0 to 3).
Continuous
PoE
Select Active to guarantee continuous power supply to the connected PDs while the Switch is
restarting after a warm reboot. The Switch will NOT perform a power cycle on the connected PDs.
If you do a cold reboot, the Switch also restarts the connected PDs.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
94
Port This is the port index number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port.
If left unchecked, the PD connected to the port cannot receive power from the Switch.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch,
you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority.
Select Critical to give the highest PD priority on the port.
Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical priority
ports are served.
Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and high
priority ports are served.
Power-Up Set how the Switch provides power to a connected PD at power-up.
802.3af - the Switch follows the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard to supply power to the
connected PDs during power-up.
Legacy - the Switch can provide power to the connected PDs that require high inrush currents at
power-up. Inrush current is the maximum, instantaneous input current drawn by the PD when first
turned on.
Pre-802.3at - the Switch initially offers power on the port according to the IEEE 802.3af standard,
and then switches to support the IEEE 802.3at standard within 75 milliseconds after a PD is
connected to the port. Select this option if the Switch is performing 2-event Layer-1 classification
(PoE+ hardware classification) or the connected PD is NOT performing Layer 2 power
classification using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
802.3at - the Switch supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet standard and can supply
power of up to 30W per Ethernet port. IEEE 802.3at is also known as PoE+ or PoE Plus. An IEEE
802.3at compatible device is referred to as Type 2. Power Class 4 (High Power) can only be used
by Type 2 devices. If the connected PD requires a Class 4 current when it is turned on, it will be
powered up in this mode.
802.3bt - the Switch supports the IEEE 802.3bt standard and can supply power of up to 60W per
Ethernet port to the connected PDs at power-up.
Max Power
(mW)
Specify the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port. If you leave
this field blank, the Switch refers to the standard or default maximum power for each class.
Note: The setting you enter here will not take effect when the power-up mode is set to
802.3bt.
Wide Range
Detection
Select this to let the Switch have a wider detection range for the PD.
The Switch detects whether a connected device is a powered device or not before supplying
power to the port. For the PD detection, the Switch applies a fixed voltage to the device and
then receives returned current. If the returned current is within the IEEE 802.3AF/AT standard
range, the device will be considered as a valid PD by the Switch.
However, in real cases, environmental interferences might easily cause the returned current to be
out of the standard range.
Table 29 Basic Setting > PoE Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
95
8.9 Interface Setup
An IPv6 address is configured on a per-interface basis. The interface can be a physical interface (for
example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, a VLAN). The Switch supports the VLAN
interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Use this screen to set IPv6 interfaces on which you can configure an IPv6 address to access and
manage the Switch. Click Basic Setting > Interface Setup in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen.
Figure 73 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
LLDP Power Via
MDI
Select this to have the Switch negotiate PoE power with the PD connected to the port by
transmitting LLDP Power Via MDI TLV frames. This helps the Switch allocate less power to the PD on
this port. The connected PD must be able to request PoE power through LLDP.
The Power Via MDI TLV allows PoE devices to advertise and discover the MDI power support
capabilities of the sending port on the remote device.
• Port Class
• MDI Supported
•MDI Enabled
• Pair Controllable
• PSE Power Pairs
•Power Class
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 29 Basic Setting > PoE Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 30 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports the VLAN
interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification number (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same ID number in the
Advanced Application > VLAN screens.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
96
8.10 IPv6
Use this screen to view the IPv6 interface status and configure Switch’s management IPv6 addresses.
Click Basic Setting > IPv6 in the navigation panel to display the IPv6 status screen as shown next.
Figure 74 Basic Setting > IPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.1 IPv6 Interface Status
Use this screen to view a specific IPv6 interface status and detailed information. Click an interface index
number in the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This field displays the index number of an entry.
Interface Type This field displays the type of interface.
Interface ID This field displays the identification number of the interface.
Interface This field displays the interface’s descriptive name which is generated automatically by the
Switch. The name is from a combination of the interface type and ID number.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 30 Basic Setting > Interface Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 31 Basic Setting > IPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of an IPv6 interface. Click on an index number to view more
interface details.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
97
Figure 75 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
MTU Size This field displays the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size for IPv6 packets on this interface.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Bucket
Size
This field displays the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages which are allowed to transmit
in a given time interval. If the bucket is full, subsequent error messages are suppressed.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Error
Interval
This field displays the time period (in milliseconds) during which ICMPv6 error messages of up to
the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Stateless
Address
Autoconfig
This field displays whether the Switch’s interface can automatically generate a link-local address
via stateless autoconfiguration.
Link Local
Address
This field displays the Switch’s link-local IP address and prefix generated by the interface. It also
shows whether the IP address is preferred, which means it is a valid address and can be used as a
sender or receiver address.
Global Unicast
Address(es)
This field displays the Switch’s global unicast address to identify this interface.
Joined Group
Address(es)
This field displays the IPv6 multicast addresses of groups the Switch’s interface joins.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
98
8.10.2 IPv6 Configuration
Use this screen to configure IPv6 settings on the Switch. Click the IPv6 Configuration link in the Basic
Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
ND DAD Active This field displays whether Neighbor Discovery (ND) Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is
enabled on the interface.
Number of
DAD Attempts
This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends for this
interface.
NS-Interval
(millisecond)
This field displays the time interval (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-sent for
this interface.
ND Reachable
Time
(millisecond)
This field displays how long (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this interface.
DHCPv6 Client
Active
This field displays whether the Switch acts as a DHCPv6 client to get an IPv6 address from a
DHCPv6 server.
Identity
Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface.
IA Type The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for
temporary addresses.
IAID Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information.
T1 This field displays the DHCPv6 T1 timer. After T1, the Switch sends the DHCPv6 server a Renew
message.
An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server
uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the
lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire.
T2 This field displays the DHCPv6 T2 timer. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond,
the Switch sends a Rebind message to any available server.
State This field displays the state of the TA. It shows
Active when the Switch obtains addresses from a DHCpv6 server and the TA is created.
Renew when the TA’s address lifetime expires and the Switch sends out a Renew message.
Rebind when the Switch doesn’t receive a response from the original DHCPv6 server and sends
out a Rebind message to another DHCPv6 server.
SID This field displays the DHCPv6 server’s unique ID.
Address This field displays the Switch’s global address which is assigned by the DHCPv6 server.
Preferred
Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address remains preferred.
Valid
Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address is valid.
DNS This field displays the DNS server address assigned by the DHCPv6 server.
Domain List This field displays the address record when the Switch queries the DNS server to resolve domain
names.
Restart
DHCPv6 Client
Click Click Here to send a new DHCP request to the DHCPv6 server and update the IPv6 address
and DNS information for this interface.
Table 32 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
99
Figure 76 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.3 IPv6 Global Setup
Use this screen to configure the global IPv6 settings. Click the link next to IPv6 Global Setup in the IPv6
Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 77 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
Table 33 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Global Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the global IPv6 settings on the
Switch.
IPv6 Interface Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can enable an IPv6 interface on the Switch.
IPv6 Addressing
IPv6 Link-Local
Address Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 link-local address for an
interface.
IPv6 Global
Address Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 global address for an
interface.
IPv6 Neighbor
Discovery
IPv6 Neighbor
Discovery Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 neighbor discovery
settings.
IPv6 Neighbor Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the
Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table.
DHCPv6 Client Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the Switch DHCPv6 client settings.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
100
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.4 IPv6 Interface Setup
Use this screen to turn on or off an IPv6 interface and enable stateless autoconfiguration on it. Click the
link next to IPv6 Interface Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 78 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Hop Limit Specify the maximum number of hops (from 1 to 255) in router advertisements. This is the
maximum number of hops on which an IPv6 packet is allowed to transmit before it is discarded by
an IPv6 router, which is similar to the TTL field in IPv4.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Bucket
Size
Specify the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages (from 1 to 200) which are allowed to
transmit in a given time interval. If the bucket is full, subsequent error messages are suppressed.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Error
Interval
Specify the time period (from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds) during which ICMPv6 error messages
of up to the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Table 35 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Active Select this option to enable the interface.
Address
Autoconfig
Select this option to allow the interface to automatically generate a link-local address via
stateless autoconfiguration.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
101
8.10.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a “private IP
address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-
local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10.
Use this screen to configure the interface’s link-local address and default gateway. Click the link next to
IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 79 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Address
Autoconfig
This field displays whether stateless autoconfiguration is enabled on the interface.
Table 35 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 36 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Link-Local
Address
Manually configure a static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
Default
Gateway
Set the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface. When an interface cannot find a routing
information for a frame’s destination, it forwards the packet to the default gateway.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Link-Local
Address
This is the static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
IPv6 Default
Gateway
This is the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
102
8.10.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup
Use this screen to configure the interface’s IPv6 global address. Click the link next to IPv6 Global Address
Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 80 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
Use this screen to configure neighbor discovery settings for each interface. Click the link next to IPv6
Neighbor Discovery Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 37 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IPv6 Global
Address
Manually configure a static IPv6 global address for the interface.
Prefix Length Specify an IPv6 prefix length that specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in
the address compose the network address.
EUI-64 Select this option to have the interface ID be generated automatically using the EUI-64 format.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Global
Address/Prefix
Length
This field displays the IPv6 global address and prefix length for the interface.
EUI-64 This shows whether the interface ID of the global address is generated using the EUI-64 format.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the selected
entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
103
Figure 81 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.8 IPv6 Neighbor Setup
Use this screen to create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table to store the
neighbor information permanently. Click the link next to IPv6 Neighbor Setup in the IPv6 Configuration
screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 38 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
DAD Attempts The Switch uses Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) with neighbor solicitation and advertisement
messages to check whether an IPv6 address is already in use before assigning it to an interface,
such as the link-local address it creates through stateless address autoconfiguration.
Specify the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations (from 0 to 600) the Switch sends for this
interface. Enter 0 to turn off DAD.
NS Interval Specify the time interval (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-
sent for this interface.
Reachable
Time
Specify how long (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this
interface.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
DAD Attempts This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends for this
interface.
NS Interval This field displays the time interval (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-sent for
this interface.
Reachable
Time
This field displays how long (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this interface.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
104
Figure 82 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports the VLAN
interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification number (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
A static IPv6 neighbor entry displays in the Management > Neighbor Table screen only when the
interface ID is also created in the Basic Setup > Interface Setup screen.
To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same ID number in the
Advanced Application > VLAN screens.
Neighbor
Address
Specify the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the interface.
MAC Specify the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Neighbor
Address
This field displays the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the selected
entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
105
8.10.9 DHCPv6 Client Setup
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s DHCP settings when it is acting as a DHCPv6 client. Click the link
next to DHCPv6 Client Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 83 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > DHCPv6 Client Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > DHCPv6 Client Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IA Type Select IA-NA to set the Switch to get a non-temporary IP address from the DHCPv6 server for this
interface.
Optionally, you can also select Rapid-Commit to have the Switch send its DHCPv6 Solicit message
with a Rapid Commit option to obtain information from the DHCPv6 server by a rapid two-
message exchange. The Switch discards any Reply messages that do not include a Rapid
Commit option. The DHCPv6 server should also support the Rapid Commit option to have it work
well.
Options Select DNS to have the Switch obtain DNS server IPv6 addresses and/or select Domain-List to
have the Switch obtain a list of domain names from the DHCP server.
Information
Refresh
Minimum
Specify the time interval (from 600 to 4294967295 seconds) at which the Switch exchanges other
configuration information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IA-NA This field displays whether the Switch obtains a non-temporary IP address from the DHCPv6 server.
Rapid-Commit This field displays whether the Switch obtains information from the DHCPv6 server by a rapid two-
message exchange.
DNS This field displays whether the Switch obtains DNS server IPv6 addresses from the DHCPv6 server.
Domain-List This field displays whether the Switch obtains a list of domain names from the DHCP server.
Information
Refresh
Minimum
This field displays the time interval (in seconds) at which the Switch exchanges other configuration
information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
106
8.11 DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa. Use the DNS screen to configure and view the default DNS servers on the Switch.
Figure 84 Basic Setting > DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.12 Cloud Management
Note: NebulaFlex for hybrid mode and NCC registration are NOT supported at the time of
writing and reserved for future use.
The Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) is a cloud-based network management system that allows you
to remotely manage and monitor Zyxel Nebula APs, Ethernet switches and security gateways.
The Switch is managed and provisioned automatically by the NCC (Nebula Control Center) when:
• It is connected to the Internet
• The Nebula Control Center Discovery feature is enabled
Table 41 Basic Setting > DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static Domain Name Server
Preference This is the priority of the DNS server address.
Server Address Enter a domain name server IPv6/IPv4 address in order to be able to use a domain name
instead of an IP address.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Domain Name Server Table
Index This field displays priority of the DNS server address.
Server Address This field displays the IP address of the DNS server.
Source This field displays whether the DNS server address is configured manually (Static) or
obtained automatically using DHCPv4 or DHCPv6.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
107
• It has been registered in the NCC.
This screen displays links to Nebula Control Center Discovery where you can have the Switch search for
the NCC (Nebula Control Center) and to Nebula Switch Registration which has a QR code containing
the Switch’s serial number and MAC address for handy registration of the Switch at NCC.
Click Basic Setting > Cloud Management in the navigation panel to display this screen.
Figure 85 Basic Setting > Cloud Management
8.12.1 Nebula Center Control Discovery
Click Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Control Center Discovery to display this screen.
Figure 86 Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Control Center Discovery
Select Active to turn on NCC discovery on the Switch. If the Switch has Internet access and has been
registered in the NCC, it will go into cloud management mode.
In cloud management mode, then NCC will first check if the firmware on the Switch needs to be
upgraded. If it does, the Switch will upgrade the firmware immediately. If the firmware doesn’t need to
be upgraded, but there is newer firmware available for the Switch, then it will be upgraded according
to the firmware upgrade schedule for the Switch on the NCC. Below is the process for upgrading
firmware:
1Download firmware via the NCC
2Upgrade the firmware and reboot.
Note: While the Switch is rebooting, don’t turn off the power.
Clear Active to turn off NCC discovery on the Switch. The Switch will not discover the NCC and remain in
standalone mode.
8.12.2 Nebula Switch Registration
Click Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Switch Registration to display this screen.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
108
Figure 87 Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Switch Registration
This screen has a QR code containing the Switch’s serial number and MAC address for handy NCC
registration of the Switch using the Nebula Mobile app. First, download the app from the Google Play
store for Android devices or the App Store for iOS devices and create an organization and site.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
109
CHAPTER 9
VLAN
9.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure 802.1Q tagged and port-based VLANs. The type of screen you
see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen.
9.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the VLAN Status screen (Section 9.2 on page 111) to view and search all VLAN groups.
• Use the VLAN Detail screen (Section 9.2.1 on page 112) to view detailed port settings and status of the
VLAN group.
• Use the Static VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.4 on page 113) to configure and view 802.1Q VLAN
parameters for the Switch.
• Use the VLAN Port Setup screen (Section 9.5 on page 115) to configure the static VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q)
settings on a port.
• Use the Voice VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.6 on page 116) to set up VLANs that allow you to group
voice traffic with defined priority and enable the switch port to carry the voice traffic separately from
data traffic to ensure the sound quality does not deteriorate.
• Use the MAC Based VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.7 on page 118) to set up VLANs that allow you to
group untagged packets into logical VLANs based on the source MAC address of the packet. This
eliminates the need to reconfigure the switch when you change ports. The switch will forward the
packets based on the source MAC address you set up previously.
• Use the Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.8 on page 119) to set up VLANs that allow you
to group untagged packets into logical VLANs based on the source MAC address of the packet. You
can specify a mask for the MAC address to create a MAC address filter and enter a weight to set the
VLAN rule’s priority.
• Use the Port-Based VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.9 on page 121) to set up VLANs where the packet
forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port.
9.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read this section to know more about VLAN and how to configure the screens.
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLANs
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a
frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can
be created statically by hand. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the
information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes
longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier, residing within
the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information, starts after
the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
110
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a
frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to
an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of
4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID
(VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and
the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is
used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN
configurations are 4,094.
Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an
802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the Switch first decides where to
forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware
switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the Switch first decides where to forward the frame, and then
inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this
can be changed.
A broadcast frame (or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system) is duplicated
only on ports that are members of the VID (except the ingress port itself), thus confining the broadcast to
a specific domain.
9.1.2.1 Port VLAN Trunking
Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through
that port. This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the
same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
Refer to the following figure. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 (V1 and V2) on devices
A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C,
D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags. However, with VLAN Trunking
enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end
devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups
that are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking port(s).
Figure 88 Port VLAN Trunking
9.1.2.2 VLAN Priority
At the time of writing, you can create static VLANs, Voice VLANs, MAC-based VLANs and Vendor ID-
based VLANs on the Switch when the VLAN type is set to 802.1Q. When a packet is received, the Switch
processes the VLAN rules in sequence. The sequence (priority) of the VLANs is:
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 bits
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
111
1Vendor ID Based VLAN
2Voice VLAN
3MAC Based VLAN
If the packet matches a VLAN rule that has a higher priority, for example, an entry with weight 250 in the
vendor ID to VLAN mapping table, the Switch assigns the corresponding VLAN ID to the packet and
stops checking the subsequent VLAN rules.
9.1.2.3 Select the VLAN Type
Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen.
Figure 89 Basic Setting > Switch Setup > Select VLAN Type
Static VLAN
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the specified
VID.
9.2 VLAN Status
Use this screen to view and search all static VLAN groups. Click Advanced Application > VLAN from the
navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
112
Figure 90 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.2.1 VLAN Details
Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the static VLAN group. Click on an index
number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details.
Figure 91 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
Table 42 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by
VID
Enter an existing VLAN ID number(s) (separated by a comma) and click Search to display only
the specified VLAN(s) in the list below.
Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
VLAN
This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
Search Results
This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below.
This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs.
Index This is the VLAN index number. Click on an index number to view more VLAN details.
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the corresponding VLAN
configuration screen.
Name This fields shows the descriptive name of the VLAN.
Tagged Port This field shows the tagged ports that are participating in the VLAN.
Untagged Port This field shows the untagged ports that are participating in the VLAN.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was
set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
Static: added as a permanent entry.
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot be seen in
one screen.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
113
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.3 VLAN Configuration
Use this screen to view IEEE 802.1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch. Click Advanced Application > VLAN
> VLAN Configuration to see the following screen.
Figure 92 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
The following table describes the labels in the above screen.
9.4 Configure a Static VLAN
Use this screen to configure a static VLAN for the Switch. Click the Static VLAN Setup link in the VLAN
Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 43 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen.
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the corresponding VLAN
configuration screen.
Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN. A tagged port is marked as T, an
untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as “–“.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was
set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
Static: added as a permanent entry.
Table 44 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Static VLAN for the Switch.
VLAN Port Setup Click Click Here to configure the VLAN Port for the Switch.
Voice VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Voice VLAN for the Switch.
MAC Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the MAC Based VLAN for the Switch.
Vendor ID Based VLAN
Setup
Click Click Here to configure the Vendor ID Based VLAN for the Switch.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
114
Figure 93 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 45 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings.
Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes. This name consists of up
to 64 printable characters. Spaces are allowed.
VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group. This is the default selection.
Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN
Group ID.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the VLAN settings.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
115
9.5 Configure VLAN Port Settings
Use this screen to configure the static VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q) settings on a port. Click the VLAN Port Setup link
in the VLAN Configuration screen.
Figure 94 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 45 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 46 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration> VLAN Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ingress Check If this check box is selected, the Switch discards incoming frames on a port for VLANs that do
not include this port in its member set.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.
PVID A PVID (Port VLAN ID) is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so
that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
116
9.6 Voice VLAN
Voice VLAN ensures that the sound quality of an IP phone is preserved from deteriorating when the data
traffic on the Switch ports is high. It groups the voice traffic with defined priority into an assigned VLAN
which enables the separation of voice and data traffic coming onto the Switch port.
You can set priority level to the Voice VLAN and add MAC address of IP phones from specific
manufacturers by using its ID from the Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUI).
Click the Voice VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Acceptable
Frame Type
Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All, Tag Only and Untag Only.
Select All from the drop-down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port.
This is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be
dropped.
Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will be
dropped.
VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly
connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through
the Switch.
Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the
ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 46 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration> VLAN Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
117
Figure 95 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 47 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Voice VLAN Global Setup
Voice VLAN Click the second radio button if you want to enable the Voice VLAN feature. Type a
VLAN ID number in the box next to the radio button that is associated with the Voice
VLAN. You also need to create a static VLAN with the same VID in the Static VLAN Setup
screen, and then connect the IP phone with the specified OUI MAC address to a port
that joins the static VLAN.
Click Disable radio button if you do not want to enable the Voice VLAN feature.
Priority Select the priority level of the Voice VLAN from 0 to 7. Default setting is 5.The higher the
numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this Voice VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to default settings.
Voice VLAN OUI Setup
OUI address Type the IP Phone manufacturer’s OUI MAC address. The first three byes is the
manufacturer identifier, the last three bytes is a unique station ID.
OUI mask Type the mask for the specified IP Phone manufacturer’s OUI MAC address to determine
which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should
match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any
hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00
and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56
matches this criteria.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
118
9.7 MAC Based VLAN
The MAC-based VLAN feature assigns incoming untagged packets to a VLAN and classifies the traffic
based on the source MAC address of the packet. When untagged packets arrive at the switch, the
source MAC address of the packet is looked up in a MAC to VLAN mapping table. If an entry is found,
the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the VLAN
table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise, the packet is dropped.
This feature allows users to change ports without having to reconfigure the VLAN. You can assign priority
to the MAC-based VLAN and define a MAC to VLAN mapping table by entering a specified source
MAC address in the MAC-based VLAN setup screen. You can also delete a MAC-based VLAN entry in
the same screen.
Click the MAC Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to see the following screen.
Figure 96 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > MAC Based VLAN Setup
Description Type an description up to 32 characters for the Voice VLAN device. For example:
Siemens.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This field displays the index number of the Voice VLAN.
OUI address This field displays the OUI address of the Voice VLAN.
OUI mask This field displays the OUI mask address of the Voice VLAN.
Description This field displays the description of the Voice VLAN with OUI address.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 47 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
119
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
9.8 Vendor ID Based VLAN
The Vendor ID based VLAN feature assigns incoming untagged packets to a VLAN and classifies the
traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet. When untagged packets arrive at the switch,
the source MAC address of the packet is looked up in a Vendor ID to VLAN mapping table. If an entry is
found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the
VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise, the packet is
dropped.
This feature allows users to change ports without having to reconfigure the VLAN. You can assign a
802.1p priority to the vendor ID based VLAN and define a vendor ID to VLAN mapping table by entering
a specified source MAC address and mask in the vendor ID based VLAN setup screen. You can also
delete a vendor ID based VLAN entry in the same screen.
For every vendor ID based VLAN rule you set, you can specify a weight number to define the rule’s
priority level. As rules are processed one after the other, stating a priority order will let you choose which
rule has to be applied first and which second.
Click the Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to see the following screen.
Table 48 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > MAC Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name up to 32 alpha numeric characters for the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address Type a MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN entry. This is the source MAC
address of the data packet that is looked up when untagged packets arrive at the Switch.
VID Type an ID (from 1 to 4094) for the VLAN that is associated with the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Priority Type a priority (0-7) that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN. The higher the
numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this MAC-based VLAN entry.
Add Click Add to save the new MAC-based VLAN entry.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the fields in the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Index This field displays the index number of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Name This field displays the name of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN entry.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Priority This field displays the priority level which is assigned to frames belonging to this MAC-based
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
120
Figure 97 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 49 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name up to 32 alpha numeric characters for the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
MAC Address Type a MAC address that is bind to the vendor ID-based VLAN entry. This is the source MAC
address of the data packet that is looked up when untagged packets arrive at the Switch.
Mask Type the mask for the specified source MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s
MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should
match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any
hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00
and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches
this criteria.
VLAN Type an ID (from 1 to 4094) for the VLAN that is associated with the vendor ID based VLAN
entry.
Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN. The higher
the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Weight Enter a number between 0 and 255 to specify the rule’s weight. This is to decide the priority
in which the rule is applied. The higher the number, the higher the rule’s priority.
Add Click Add to save the new vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the fields in the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Index This field displays the index number of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Name This field displays the name of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address that is bind to the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Mask This field displays the mask for the source MAC address that is bind to the vendor ID based
VLAN entry.
VLAN This field displays the VLAN ID of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Priority This field displays the priority level which is assigned to frames belonging to this vendor ID
based VLAN.
Weight This field displays the weight of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
121
9.9 Port-Based VLAN Setup
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port.
Port-based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port. Therefore, if you wish to
allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example, between conference rooms in a hotel, you
must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data packet
leaves) for both ports.
Port-based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created.
Note: When you activate port-based VLAN, the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1. You
cannot change it.
Note: In screens (such as IP Setup and Filtering) that require a VID, you must enter 1 as the VID.
The port-based VLAN setup screen is shown next. The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all
Ethernet ports.
9.9.1 Configure a Port-Based VLAN
Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen and then click Advanced
Application > VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen.
Figure 98 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected)
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 49 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
122
Figure 99 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup
label Description
Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation.
All connected means all ports can communicate with each other, that is, there are no virtual
LANs. All incoming and outgoing ports are selected. This option is the most flexible but also the
least secure.
Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and
cannot communicate with each other. All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU
outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the most secure.
After you make your selection, click Apply (top right of screen) to display the screens as
mentioned above. You can still customize these settings by adding/deleting incoming or
outgoing ports, but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen.
Incoming These are the ingress ports; an ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through which a data
packet enters. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must define the
ingress port for both ports. The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the
corresponding port listed on the left (its outgoing port). CPU refers to the Switch management
port. By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular
port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port.
Outgoing These are the egress ports; an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data
packet leaves. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must define the
egress port for both ports. CPU refers to the Switch management port. By default it forms a VLAN
with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be
managed from that port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
123
CHAPTER 10
Static MAC Forwarding
10.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your
network.
Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding.
10.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Static MAC Forwarding screen (Section 10.2 on page 123) to assign static MAC addresses for a
port.
10.2 Configure Static MAC Forwarding
A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table. Static
MAC addresses do not age out. When you set up static MAC address rules, you are setting static MAC
addresses for a port. This may reduce the need for broadcasting.
Click Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen as shown.
Figure 100 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding
Chapter 10 Static MAC Forwarding
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
124
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
Note: Static MAC addresses do not age out.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number.
Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically
forwarded.
Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is turned
off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the
non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port.
Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or not (No). You
may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address-
forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to
which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
125
CHAPTER 11
Static Multicast Forwarding
11.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on multicast MAC addresses of devices
on your network.
Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding.
11.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Static Multicast Forwarding screen (Section 11.2 on page 126) to configure rules to forward
specific multicast frames, such as streaming or control frames, to specific port(s).
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group. A static multicast
address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table. Static
multicast addresses do not age out. Static multicast forwarding allows you (the administrator) to forward
multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first.
If a multicast group has no members, then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or
drop them. Figure 101 on page 125 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports. With static
multicast forwarding, you can forward these multicasts to port(s) within a VLAN group. Figure 102 on
page 126 shows frames being forwarded to devices connected to port 3. Figure 103 on page 126 shows
frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4.
Figure 101 No Static Multicast Forwarding
Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
126
Figure 102 Static Multicast Forwarding to A Single Port
Figure 103 Static Multicast Forwarding to Multiple Ports
11.2 Configure Static Multicast Forwarding
Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames, such as streaming or control
frames, to specific port(s).
Click Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown.
Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
127
Figure 104 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this static multicast MAC
address forwarding rule. This is for identification only.
MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group. The last binary bit of the first
octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1. For example, the first octet pair 00000001 is 01
and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal, so 01:00:5e:00:00:0A and 03:00:5e:00:00:27 are valid multicast
MAC addresses.
VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port(s) within a VLAN group.
Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here. If you don’t have a specific target VLAN, enter 1.
Port Enter the port(s) where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are
forwarded. You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For
example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is turned
off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the
non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port(s).
Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or not
(No). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC
address-forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group.
VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified
multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Port This field displays the port(s) within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the
specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
128
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 52 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
129
CHAPTER 12
Filtering
12.1 Filtering Overview
This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering.
Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and/or destination MAC
addresses and VLAN group (ID).
12.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Filtering screen (Section 12.2 on page 129) to create rules for traffic going through the Switch.
12.2 Configure a Filtering Rule
Use this screen to create rules for traffic going through the Switch. Click Advanced Application > Filtering
in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 105 Advanced Application > Filtering
Chapter 12 Filtering
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
130
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 53 Advanced Application > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule
without deleting it by deselecting this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for identification
only.
Action Select Discard source to drop the frames from the source MAC address (specified in the MAC field).
The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address.
Select Discard destination to drop the frames to the destination MAC address (specified in the MAC
address). The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address.
Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to/from the MAC address specified in
the MAC field.
MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the settings.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
MAC Address This field displays the source/destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to
which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
131
CHAPTER 13
Spanning Tree Protocol
13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) as defined in
the following standards.
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
13.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.2 on page 133) to view the RSTP status.
• Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol screen (Section 13.3 on page 134) to configure RSTP settings.
13.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on STP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
(Rapid) Spanning Tree Protocol
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your network to ensure that
only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The Switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allows faster convergence of the
spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STP-only aware bridges). In RSTP,
topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that
generates the topology change. In STP, a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology
change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network. Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted
learned addresses from the filtering database. In RSTP, the port states are Discarding, Learning, and
Forwarding.
Note: In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.
STP Terminology
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
132
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. The recommended cost is
assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the
higher the cost.
On each bridge, the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root. It is the
port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root port, then
this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root
among the bridges connected to the LAN.
How STP Works
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with STP, it enables the root port and the ports
that are the designated ports for connected LANs, and disables all other ports that participate in STP.
Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports, eliminating any possible
network loops.
STP-aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the bridged LAN
topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol
Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined
interval (Max Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This bridge then initiates
negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re-establish a valid network topology.
STP Port States
STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping. A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from
blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
Table 54 STP Path Costs
LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE RECOMMENDED RANGE ALLOWED RANGE
Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535
Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535
Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535
Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1 to 5 1 to 65535
Table 55 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Disabled STP is disabled (default).
Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed.
Listening All BPDUs are received and processed.
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Learning All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are submitted to the learning process
but not forwarded.
Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and forwarded.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
133
13.2 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status
screen as shown next. See Section 13.1 on page 131 for more information on RSTP.
Figure 106 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RSTP Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch. This
Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID
is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second)
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration
message. The root bridge determines Hello Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration
message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second)
This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is, listening to
learning to forwarding).
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
Topology
Changed Times
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
134
13.3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Use this screen to configure RSTP settings, see Section 13.1 on page 131 for more information on RSTP.
Click RSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC addresses,
but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not forward
frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processes BPDUs and
forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forwarding port on a non-root bridge, which has the lowest path cost and is the
best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge does not have a root
port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This path is
different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state when the
designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment where
a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the same LAN
segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID
This field displays the identifier of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the identifier of the designated bridge for the
LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designated bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from the
designated port for the LAN segament to which this port is connected,
Table 56 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
135
Figure 107 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen (see Figure 106 on page 133).
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP. Clear this check box to disable RSTP.
Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The switch
with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches
have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root
switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time, Max Age and
Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration
message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds.
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All Switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs
at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last BPDU)
becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is
selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40
seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch will wait before changing states. This delay is
required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information
that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
136
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding
state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is
configured as an edge port or when its link status changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge
Protocol Data Unit (BPDU).
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended
to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the
cost - see Table 54 on page 132 for more information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 57 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
137
CHAPTER 14
Bandwidth Control
14.1 Bandwidth Control Overview
This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen.
Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or out-going
traffic flows on a port.
14.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Bandwidth Control screen (Section 14.2 on page 137) to limit the bandwidth for traffic going
through the Switch.
14.2 Bandwidth Control Setup
Click Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as
shown next.
Figure 108 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control
Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
138
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 58 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the
common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate ingress rate limits on this port.
Ingress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic flow
on a port.
Note: Ingress rate bandwidth control applies to layer 2 traffic only.
Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port.
Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the out-going traffic
flow on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
139
CHAPTER 15
Broadcast Storm Control
15.1 Broadcast Storm Control Overview
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature.
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF)
packets the Switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable
broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets are
discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your network. You
can specify limits for each packet type on each port.
15.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Broadcast Storm Control screen (Section 15.2 on page 139) to limit the number of broadcast,
multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the Switch receives per second on the ports.
15.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup
Click Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 109 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control
Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
140
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 59 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch. Clear this check box to
disable this feature.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Broadcast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second.
Multicast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second.
DLF (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the port
receives per second.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
141
CHAPTER 16
Mirroring
16.1 Mirroring Overview
This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens.
Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port (the port you copy the traffic to) in order
that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference.
16.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Mirroring screen (Section 16.2 on page 141) to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow
to be copied to the monitor port.
16.2 Port Mirroring Setup
Click Advanced Application > Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen. Use this
screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port.
Figure 110 Advanced Application > Mirroring
Chapter 16 Mirroring
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
142
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 Advanced Application > Mirroring
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch. Clear this check box to disable the
feature.
Monitor
Port
The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without
interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s). Enter the port number of the monitor port.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the
common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.
Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop-down list box. Choices are
Egress (outgoing), Ingress (incoming) and Both.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
143
CHAPTER 17
Link Aggregation
17.1 Link Aggregation Overview
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higher-bandwidth
link.
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You
may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize
a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link. However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer
available ports you have. A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports.
The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group.
17.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Link Aggregation Status screen (Section 17.2 on page 144) to view ports you have configured
to be in the trunk group, ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in the trunk group
and so on.
• Use the Link Aggregation Setting screen (Section 17.3 on page 145) to configure to enable static link
aggregation.
• Use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol screen (Section 17.3.1 on page 146) to enable Link
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
17.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation.
Note: In a properly planned network, it is recommended to implement static link aggregation
only. This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your
Switch.
See Section 17.4.1 on page 148 for a static port trunking example.
Dynamic Link Aggregation
The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
The IEEE 802.3ad standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for dynamically
creating and managing trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with the ports
at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port redundancy, that is, if an
operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become operational without user intervention.
Please note that:
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
144
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for
LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode and flow
control settings.
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network
topology loops.
Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information1:
17.2 Link Aggregation Status
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation in the navigation panel. The Link Aggregation Status
screen displays by default. See Section 17.1 on page 143 for more information.
Figure 111 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 61 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
Table 62 Link Aggregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
1. Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual port.
Table 63 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group, that is, one logical link containing multiple
ports.
Enabled Ports These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group.
The port number(s) displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging
to this group.
Synchronized
Ports
These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
145
17.3 Link Aggregation Setting
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown
next. See Section 17.1 on page 143 for more information on link aggregation.
Figure 112 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting
Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following: system priority, MAC address, key, port priority and
port number. Refer to Link Aggregation ID on page 144 for more information on this field.
The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled
for this group.
Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group. Packets from the
same source and/or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk.
src-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC address.
src-dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source
and destination MAC addresses.
src-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
src-dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source
and destination IP addresses.
Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group. It displays:
•Static - if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group.
•LACP - if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP.
Table 63 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
146
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
17.3.1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LAC P to display the screen
shown next. See Dynamic Link Aggregation on page 143 for more information on dynamic link
aggregation.
Table 64 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Setting
This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
Active Select this option to activate a trunk group.
Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type. Packets from the same source and/or to the same
destination are sent over the same link within the trunk. By default, the Switch uses the src-dst-mac
distribution type. If the Switch is behind a router, the packet’s destination or source MAC address
will be changed. In this case, set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make
sure port trunking can work properly.
Select src-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
Select dst-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC address.
Select src-dst-mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination MAC addresses.
Select src-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
Select dst-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
Select src-dst-ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination IP addresses.
Port This field displays the port number.
Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs.
Note: When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port
security settings for a port, you cannot include the port in an active trunk group.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
147
Figure 113 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Control
Protocol
Note: Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable dynamic link
aggregation.
Active Select this check box to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
System Priority LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest system priority
(and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the LACP “server”. The LACP
“server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of an active port
using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The smaller the number, the higher the priority
level.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
148
17.4 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
17.4.1 Static Trunking Example
This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2-5.
1Make your physical connections - make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group
are connected to the same destination. The following figure shows ports 2-5 on switch A connected to
switch B.
Figure 114 Trunking Example - Physical Connections
2Configure static trunking - Click Advanced Application > Link Aggreg ation > Link Aggregation Setting. In
this screen activate trunk group T1, select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select
the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below. Click Apply when you are done.
LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to
check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three tries,
then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short timeout (one second)
for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as
possible.
Select either 1 second or 30 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 65 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
149
Figure 115 Trunking Example - Configuration Screen
Your trunk group 1 (T1) configuration is now complete.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
150
CHAPTER 18
Time Range
18.1 Time Range Overview
You can set up one-time and recurring schedules for time-oriented features, such as PoE and classifier.
The UAG supports one-time and recurring schedules. One-time schedules are effective only once, while
recurring schedules usually repeat. Both types of schedules are based on the current date and time in
the Switch.
18.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Time Range screen (Section 18.2 on page 150) to view or define a schedule on the Switch.
18.2 Configuring Time Range
Click Advanced Application > Time Range in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 116 Advanced Application > Time Range
Chapter 18 Time Range
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
151
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 Advanced Application > Time Range
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Type Select Absolute to create a one-time schedule. One-time schedules begin on a specific start
date and time and end on a specific stop date and time. One-time schedules are useful for
long holidays and vacation periods.
Alternatively, select Periodic to create a recurring schedule. Recurring schedules begin at a
specific start time and end at a specific stop time on selected days of the week (Sunday,
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday). Recurring schedules are useful
for defining the workday and off-work hours.
Absolute This section is available only when you set Type to Absolute.
Start Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule begins.
End Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule ends.
Periodic This section is available only when you set Type to Periodic.
Select the first option if you want to define a recurring schedule for a consecutive time period.
You then select the day of the week, hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
respectively.
Select the second option if you want to define a recurring schedule for multiple non-
consecutive time periods. You need to select each day of the week the recurring schedule is
effective. You also need to specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
each day. The schedule begins and ends in the same day.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the settings.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Type This field displays the type of the schedule.
Range This field displays the the time period(s) to which this schedule applies.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
152
CHAPTER 19
Queuing Method
19.1 Queuing Method Overview
This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported.
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion. Use the
Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic. See also Priority Queue
Assignment in Switch Setup and 802.1p Priority in Port Setup for related information.
19.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Queueing Method screen (Section 19.2 on page 153) set priorities for the queues of the Switch.
This distributes bandwidth across the different traffic queues.
19.1.2 What You Need to Know
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual
source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
Strictly Priority Queuing
Strictly Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the Switch,
traffic on the highest priority queue, Q7 is transmitted first. When that queue empties, traffic on the next
highest-priority queue, Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties, and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on.
If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent. SPQ does not
automatically adapt to changing network requirements.
Weighted Fair Queuing
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth
weight (portion) (the number you configure in the Weight field) when there is traffic congestion. WFQ is
activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more
guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in
that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues. By default, the weight for Q0
is 1, for Q1 is 2, for Q2 is 3, and so on.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more
traffic than it can handle. A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming
traffic on that port. This queue then moves to the back of the list. The next queue is given an equal
amount of bandwidth, and then moves to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the number of
queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty.
Chapter 19 Queuing Method
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
153
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling, but
services queues based on their priority and queue weight (the number you configure in the queue
Weight field) rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth. WRR is activated only when a port has more
traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller
weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the
different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied.
19.2 Configuring Queuing
Use this screen to set priorities for the queues of the Switch. This distributes bandwidth across the different
traffic queues.
Click Advanced Application > Queuing Method in the navigation panel.
Figure 117 Advanced Application > Queuing Method
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Advanced Application > Queuing Method
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This label shows the port you are configuring.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the
common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 19 Queuing Method
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
154
Method Select SPQ (Strictly Priority Queuing), WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) or WRR (Weighted Round Robin).
Strictly Priority Queuing services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue
empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue begins. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 the
lowest.
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on their
bandwidth portion (weight) (the number you configure in the Weight field). Queues with larger
weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight
(the number you configure in the queue Weight field). Queues with larger weights get more service
than queues with smaller weights.
Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here. Bandwidth is divided across the different
traffic queues according to their weights.
Hybrid-SPQ
Lowest-
Queue
This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR.
Select a queue (Q0 to Q7) to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue(s) after and
including the specified queue for the port. For example, if you select Q5, the Switch services traffic on
Q5, Q6 and Q7 using SPQ.
Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to
the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 67 Advanced Application > Queuing Method (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
155
CHAPTER 20
Multicast
20.1 Multicast Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features.
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or
Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts
on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112, RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for
information on IGMP versions 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
20.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Multicast Setup screen (Section 20.2 on page 156) to display the links to the configuration
screens where you can configure IPv4 multicast settings.
• Use the IPv4 Multicast Status screen (Section 20.3 on page 156) to view multicast group information.
• Use the IGMP Snooping screen (Section 20.3.1 on page 157) to enable IGMP snooping to forward
group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group.
20.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on Multicasting that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast
group) in a different subnetwork. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not
individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for
IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes (see the IANA
website for more information).
IGMP Snooping
A Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP
multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it,
picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping
allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from IGMP
snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. IGMP
Chapter 20 Multicast
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
156
snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic
passing through your Switch.
IGMP Snooping and VLANs
The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs. You can configure the Switch to
automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs. The Switch then performs IGMP
snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets. This is referred to as auto mode. Alternatively,
you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on. This is referred to as fixed
mode. In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than
those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN.
20.2 Multicast Setup
Use this screen to configure IGMP for IPv4. Click Advanced Application > Multicast in the navigation
panel.
Figure 118 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.3 IPv4 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast to display the screen as shown. This screen
shows the IPv4 multicast group information. See Section 20.1 on page 155 for more information on
multicasting.
Figure 119 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Multicast Click the link to open screens where you can configure IGMP snooping and IGMP filtering for
IPv4.
Table 69 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This is the index number of the entry.
VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Chapter 20 Multicast
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
157
20.3.1 IGMP Snooping
Click the IGMP Snooping link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast screen to display
the screen as shown. See Section 20.1 on page 155 for more information on multicasting.
Figure 120 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.
Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
Table 69 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 70 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP snooping.
Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that
are members of that group.
Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with
the multicast hosts attached.
Host Timeout Specify the time (from 1 to 16 711 450) in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an
IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control
packets. Otherwise, select No-Change to not replace the priority.
IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port
can join.
If you enable IGMP filtering, you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that
you want to allow to join multicast groups.
Chapter 20 Multicast
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
158
Unknown Multicast
Frame
Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame. Select
Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
Reserved Multicast
Group
The IP address range of 224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 are reserved for multicasting on the local
network only. For example, 224.0.0.1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and 224.0.0.9 is
used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment. A
multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to
other networks. See the IANA web site for more information.
The layer-2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer-2 protocols, 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CC
and 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CD, are also included in this group.
Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast
address. Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Immed. Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP
version 2 leave message is received on this port.
Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port.
Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value (from 200 to 6,348,800) in miliseconds. Select this
option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port.
In normal leave mode, when the Switch receives an IGMP leave message from a host on a
port, it forwards the message to the multicast router. The multicast router then sends out an
IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine whether other hosts connected to
the port should remain in the specific multicast group. The Switch forwards the query message
to all hosts connected to the port and waits for IGMP reports from hosts to update the
forwarding table.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP
snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a
host.
Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value (from 200 to 6,348,800) in miliseconds. Select this
option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port.
In fast leave mode, right after receiving an IGMP leave message from a host on a port, the
Switch itself sends out an IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine whether
other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group. This helps
speed up the leave process.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP
snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a
host.
Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num. Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered in the
specified number of multicast groups, any new IGMP join report frame(s) is dropped on this
port.
Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum
number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached.
Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast
forwarding table entry is aged out.
Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new
IGMP report(s) received on this port.
Table 70 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (continued) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 20 Multicast
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
159
20.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the IGMP
Snooping link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown. See IGMP Snooping
and VLANs on page 156 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN.
Figure 121 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN
IGMP Filtering
Profile
Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select Default to
prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.
You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP
Filtering Profile screen.
IGMP Querier
Mode
The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router (or
server). The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port.
Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP
query packets.
Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port. Select this when
you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port.
Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port. The Switch will not
keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port. The Switch does not forward
IGMP join or leave packets to this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 70 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (continued) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 20 Multicast
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
160
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile
An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are
able to join. A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to
join. Profiles are assigned to ports (in the IGMP Snooping screen). Clients connected to those ports are
then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile. Each port can be assigned a single profile.
A profile can be assigned to multiple ports.
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the IGMP
Snooping link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Table 71 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs
automatically.
Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the
VLAN(s) that you specify below.
In either auto or fixed mode, the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs.
The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs.
You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping screen
first.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP
snooping.
Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes.
VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table. Click on an index
number to view more details or change the settings.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 20 Multicast
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
161
Figure 122 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that you have already added, enter the profile
name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to
belong to the IGMP filter profile.
End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to
the IGMP filter profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start Address and End
Address fields.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range.
End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range.
Delete Profile Select a profile’s check box to select a specific profile. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all profiles.
Delete Rule Select the check box(es) of the rule(s) that you want to remove from a profile.
Delete To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want to
remove in the Delete Profile column, then click the Delete button.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete Rule
column, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile/Delete Rule check boxes.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
162
CHAPTER 21
AAA
21.1 AAA Overview
This chapter describes how to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on the
Switch.
The external servers that perform authentication, authorization and accounting functions are known as
AAA servers. The Switch supports RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, see RADIUS on
page 163) as external authentication and authorization servers.
Figure 123 AAA Server
21.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the AAA screen (Section 21.2 on page 163) to display the links to the screens where you can
enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the Switch.
• use the RADIUS Server Setup screen (Section 21.3 on page 163) to configure your RADIUS server
settings.
• Use the AAA Setup screen (Section 21.4 on page 165) to configure authentication, authorization and
accounting settings, such as the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch and which
database the Switch should use first.
21.1.2 What You Need to Know
Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch. The
Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself.
The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users.
Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do. Different user accounts may
have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them. For example, user A may have the right to
create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot. The Switch can authorize users based on
user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number
of users.
Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing. The Switch can use an external server to
track when users log in, log out, execute commands and so on. Accounting can also record system
related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch.
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
163
Local User Accounts
By storing user profiles locally on the Switch, your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users
without interacting with a network AAA server. However, there is a limit on the number of users you may
authenticate in this way (See Section 32.4 on page 254).
RADIUS
RADIUS is a security protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of (or in
addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device. In
essence, RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central
location.
21.2 AAA Screens
The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the Switch.
First, configure your authentication server settings and then set up the authentication priority, activate
authorization.
Click Advanced Application > AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 124 Advanced Application > AAA
21.3 RADIUS Server Setup
Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings. See RADIUS on page 163 for more information
on RADIUS servers and Section 21.5.2 on page 169 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the authentication
features on the Switch. Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as
shown.
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
164
Figure 125 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Server
Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings.
Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers.
Select index-priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server,
if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second
RADIUS server.
Select round-robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication
requests to.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request
response from the RADIUS server.
If you are using index-priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers
then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers. For example, if you set the
timeout value to 30 seconds, then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for
15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a RADIUS server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value
unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external RADIUS server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be the
same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch.
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
165
21.4 AAA Setup
Use this screen to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on the Switch. Click
on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch. This entry
is deleted when you click Apply.
Accounting
Server
Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request
response from the RADIUS accounting server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813. You need not change
this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This key
must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the
Switch. This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 73 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
166
Figure 126 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch.
Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use (first, second and third) to
authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts (users for Switch management).
Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands (See the CLI Reference Guide) for
local authentication. The RADIUS is an external server. Before you specify the priority, make sure
you have set up the corresponding database correctly first.
You can specify up to two methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of
administrators. The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them (first Method 1,
and then Method 2). You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field. If you want the
Switch to check another source for access privilege level specify it in the Method 2 field.
Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication.
Select radius to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external server.
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
167
Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use (first and second) to authenticate
administrator accounts (users for Switch management).
Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control > Logins screen. The RADIUS is an
external server. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding
database correctly first.
You can specify up to two methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts. The
Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them (first Method 1, and then Method
2). You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field. If you want the Switch to check
another source for administrator accounts, specify them in the Method 2 field.
Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access
Control > Logins screen.
Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your RADIUS
server.
Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch.
Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user.
•Exec: Allow an administrator which logs into the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have a
different access privilege level assigned via the external server.
Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types.
Console Select this to allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through the console port to have
different access privilege level assigned via the external server.
Method RADIUS is the only method for authorization of the Exec type of service.
Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch.
Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting
server. This is only valid if you select the start-stop option for the Exec entries.
Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server(s):
• System - Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur:
system boots up, system shuts down, system accounting is enabled, system accounting is
disabled.
• Exec - Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out
via the console port, telnet or SSH.
Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types.
Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting
servers at the same time.
If you don’t select this and you have two accounting servers set up, then the Switch sends
information to the first accounting server and if it doesn’t get a response from the accounting
server then it tries the second accounting server.
Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events. Select:
• start-stop - to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins
a session, during a user’s session (if it lasts past the Update Period), and when a user ends a
session.
• stop-only - to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user
ends a session.
Method RADIUS is the only method for recording System or Exec type of event.
Privilege This field is not configurable for System and Exec types of events.
Table 74 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
168
21.5 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
21.5.1 Vendor Specific Attribute
RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor-specific information between a RADIUS server
and a network access device (for example, the Switch). A company can create Vendor Specific
Attributes (VSAs) to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server.
The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication:
• Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to.
• Assign account privilege levels (See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account
privilege levels) for the authenticated user.
The VSAs are composed of the following:
•Vendor-ID: An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority). Zyxel’s vendor ID is 890.
•Vendor-Type: A vendor specified attribute, identifying the setting you want to modify.
•Vendor-data: A value you want to assign to the setting.
Note: Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure
VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server.
The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 74 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 75 Supported VSAs
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
Ingress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 1
Vendor-data = ingress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
169
21.5.1.1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute
You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server (refer to your RADIUS server
documentation) to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN. The port VLAN settings are fixed and
untagged. This will also set the port’s VID. The following table describes the values you need to
configure. Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580.
21.5.2 Supported RADIUS Attributes
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) attributes are data used to define specific
authentication elements in a user profile, which is stored on the RADIUS server. This appendix lists the
RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch.
Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication.
This section lists the attributes used by authentication functions on the Switch. In cases where the
attribute has a specific format associated with it, the format is specified.
21.5.3 Attributes Used for Authentication
The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing
authentication.
Egress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 2
Vendor-data = egress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Privilege Assignment Vendor-ID = 890
Vendor-Type = 3
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
or
Vendor-ID = 9 (CISCO)
Vendor-Type = 1 (CISCO-AVPAIR)
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
where N is a privilege level (from 0 to 14).
Note: If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS
server(s) and the Switch, the user is assigned a privilege level from the
database (RADIUS or local) the Switch uses first for user authentication.
Table 75 Supported VSAs
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
Table 76 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
VLAN Assignment Tunnel-Type = VLAN(13)
Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802(6)
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = VLAN ID
Note: You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch.
Chapter 21 AAA
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
170
21.5.3.1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access
User-Name
- The format of the User-Name attribute is $enab#$, where # is the privilege level (1-14).
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
21.5.3.2 Attributes Used to Login Users
User-Name
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
171
CHAPTER 22
DHCP Snooping
22.1 Overview
With DHCP snooping, the Switch can build the binding table dynamically by snooping DHCP packets
(dynamic bindings) and filter unauthorized DHCP packets in your network.
The Switch uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP packets in
your network. A binding contains these key attributes:
• MAC address
• VLAN ID
• IP address
• Port number
When the Switch receives a DHCP packet, it looks up the appropriate MAC address, VLAN ID, IP
address, and port number in the binding table. If there is a binding, the Switch forwards the packet. If
there is not a binding, the Switch discards the packet.
22.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the DHCP Snooping screen (Section 22.2 on page 171) to look at various statistics about the DHCP
snooping database.
• Use this DHCP Snooping Configure screen (Section 22.3 on page 174) to enable DHCP snooping on
the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located, and
configure the DHCP snooping database.
• Use the DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen (Section 22.3.1 on page 176) to specify whether ports
are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
• Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen (Section 22.3.2 on page 177) to enable DHCP
snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82
information to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN.
• Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure screen (Section 22.3.3 on page 178) to apply a different
DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN.
22.2 DHCP Snooping
Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database. To open this screen, click
Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping.
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
172
Figure 127 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database. You can
configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen. See Section 22.3 on page 174.
Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database.
Write delay timer This field displays how long (in seconds) the Switch tries to complete a specific update
in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
173
Abort timer This field displays how long (in seconds) the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping
database after the current bindings change.
This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the
DHCP snooping database.
Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping
database.
None: The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database.
Read: The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database.
Write: The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database.
Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer (in seconds) the Switch tries to complete the
current update before it gives up. It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating
the DHCP snooping database right now.
Abort timer expiry This field displays when (in seconds) the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping
database again. It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed
since the last update.
This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP
snooping database.
Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
successfully.
Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch
successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database.
Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP
snooping database for any reason.
Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP
snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the
DHCP snooping database.
Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the
bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully.
Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or
update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database.
Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP
snooping database successfully.
Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the
DHCP snooping database.
Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP
snooping database successfully.
Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in
the DHCP snooping database.
Database detail
First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for
any reason.
Last ignored bindings
counters
This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings
the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database. You can clear these
counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands. See the CLI Reference
Guide.
Table 77 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
174
22.3 DHCP Snooping Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN where
the default DHCP server is located, and configure the DHCP snooping database. The DHCP snooping
database stores the current bindings on a secure, external TFTP server so that they are still available after
a restart. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure.
Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch
already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number
was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was
unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time
had already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does
not exist anymore.
Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the
DHCP binding database.
Total ignored bindings
counters
This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read
bindings from the DHCP binding database. You can clear these counters by restarting
the Switch or using CLI commands. See the CLI Reference Guide.
Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch
already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port
number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch
was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease
time had already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID
does not exist anymore.
Table 77 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
175
Figure 128 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 78 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch. You still have to enable DHCP
snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports.
Note: If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports, DHCP requests will
not succeed.
DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a
specific VLAN.
Note: You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too.
You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen (Section 22.3.2
on page 177) to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from
different VLAN.
Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific
VLAN.
Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval, it is possible that the next update
is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out.
In this case, the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one.
Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database. The location should be expressed
like this: tftp://{domain name or IP address}/directory, if applicable/file name; for
example, tftp://192.168.10.1/database.txt.
Timeout interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the Switch tries to complete a specific update in
the DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
Write delay interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping
database the first time the current bindings change after an update. Once the next
update is scheduled, additional changes in current bindings are automatically
included in the next update.
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
176
22.3.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure
Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
Note: If DHCP snooping is enabled but there are no trusted ports, DHCP requests cannot
reach the DHCP server.
You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port (trusted or untrusted) can
receive each second. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure >
Port.
Figure 129 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Renew DHCP
Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database, and click Renew if you want the
Switch to load it. You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP
snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL.
When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database, it does not
discard the current dynamic bindings first. If there is a conflict, the Switch keeps the
dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the
DHCP Snooping screen (Section 22.2 on page 171).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 78 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 79 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number. If you configure the * port, the settings are applied to all
of the ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
177
22.3.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds
DHCP relay agent option 82 information (Chapter 29 on page 222) to DHCP requests that the Switch
relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > DHCP
Snooping > Configure > VLAN.
Figure 130 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches, and the Switch discards
DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers, and the Switch discards DHCP packets from
untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the
current bindings.
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and source
port do not match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
Rate (pps) Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets (1-256) that the Switch receives from each
port each second. The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets. Enter 0 to disable this
limit, which is recommended for trusted ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 79 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 80 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by VID Specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below. Use a comma (,) to separate
individual VLANs or a dash (-) to indicates a range of VLANs. For example, “3,4” or “3-9”.
Search Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
178
22.3.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port.
Figure 131 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure
the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN. You still have to enable DHCP snooping
on the Switch and specify trusted ports.
Note: If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports, DHCP requests will not
succeed.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports in the
specified VLAN(s). The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port number, VLAN
ID and/or system name) specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the
DHCP VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping
Configure screen (see Section 22.3 on page 174).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot be
seen in one screen.
Table 80 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 81 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82
profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For
example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
179
22.4 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
22.4.1 DHCP Snooping Overview
Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table
dynamically. This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers.
22.4.1.1 Trusted vs. Untrusted Ports
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping. This setting is independent of
the trusted/untrusted setting for ARP inspection. You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP
packets that each port (trusted or untrusted) can receive each second.
Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches. The Switch discards DHCP packets from
trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high. The Switch learns dynamic
bindings from trusted ports.
Note: If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports, DHCP requests will not succeed.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers. The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in
the following situations:
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified port(s)
in this VLAN. The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port number, VLAN ID
and/or system name) specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the
DHCP VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping
Configure screen (see Section 22.3 on page 174).
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP Snooping >
Configure > VLAN screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable, to
clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s).
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove in the Delete column, then click the Delete
button to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Table 81 Advanced Application > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
180
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current
bindings.
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and source port do not
match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
22.4.1.2 DHCP Snooping Database
The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory. If the Switch restarts, it loads static bindings from
permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings, in which case the devices in the network have to
send DHCP requests again. As a result, it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database.
The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection
in a file on an external TFTP server. If you set up the DHCP snooping database, the Switch can reload the
dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts.
You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server. The file has the following
format:
Figure 132 DHCP Snooping Database File Format
The <initial-checksum> helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings
from previous updates. Each binding consists of 72 bytes, a space, and another checksum that is used
to validate the binding when it is read. If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the
file, that binding and all others after it are ignored.
22.4.1.3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information
The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard. This provides the DHCP server
more information about the source of the requests. The Switch can add the following information:
• Slot ID (1 byte), port ID (1 byte), and source VLAN ID (2 bytes)
• System name (up to 32 bytes)
This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client
DHCP request frames. See Chapter 29 on page 222 for more information about DHCP relay option 82.
When the DHCP server responds, the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field
before forwarding the response to the original source.
You can configure this setting for each source VLAN. This setting is independent of the DHCP relay
settings (Chapter 29 on page 222).
<initial-checksum>
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
<binding-1> <checksum-1>
<binding-2> <checksum-1-2>
...
...
<binding-n> <checksum-1-2-..-n>
END
Chapter 22 DHCP Snooping
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
181
22.4.1.4 Configuring DHCP Snooping
Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch.
1Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch.
2Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN, and configure DHCP relay option 82.
3Configure trusted and untrusted ports, and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each
port can receive per second.
4Configure static bindings.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
182
CHAPTER 23
Loop Guard
23.1 Loop Guard Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network.
Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on
that port loop back to the Switch. While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to prevent loops in the
core of your network. STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network.
Figure 133 Loop Guard vs. STP
Refer to Section 23.1.2 on page 182 for more information.
23.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Loop Guard screen (Section 23.2 on page 184) to enable loop guard on the Switch and in
specific ports.
23.1.2 What You Need to Know
Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network. This can occur when a
port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state. Loop state occurs as a result of human error. It
happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable. When a switch in loop state
sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re-broadcast again and
again causing a broadcast storm.
If a switch (not in loop state) connects to a switch in loop state, then it will be affected by the switch in
loop state in the following way:
• It will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state.
• It will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back. It will then re-broadcast
those messages again.
Chapter 23 Loop Guard
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
183
The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B. Switch B is in loop state. When
broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B, they are sent back to port N on A as
they are rebroadcast from B.
Figure 134 Switch in Loop State
The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop
state. This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on
the same port. If this is the case, the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state.
The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch
B. Since switch B is in loop state, the probe packet P returns to port N on A. The Switch then shuts down
port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state.
Figure 135 Loop Guard - Probe Packet
The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port. In other
words loop guard also protects against standard network loops. The following figure illustrates three
switches forming a loop. A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown. In this example,
the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port. As long as loop guard is enabled on
port N. The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch.
Figure 136 Loop Guard - Network Loop
Note: After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re-activate the disabled port
via the web configurator (see Section 8.7 on page 88) or via commands (See the CLI
Reference Guide).
Chapter 23 Loop Guard
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
184
23.2 Loop Guard Setup
Click Advanced Application > Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Note: The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP) enabled.
Figure 137 Advanced Application > Loop Guard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 82 Advanced Application > Loop Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch.
The Switch generates syslog, internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a
port via the loop guard feature.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port. The Switch sends probe
packets from this port to check if the switch it is connected to is in loop state. If the switch that
this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port.
Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
185
CHAPTER 24
Error Disable
24.1 Error Disable Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port, and set the Switch
to take an action (such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets) on a port when the Switch
detects a pre-configured error. It also shows you how to configure the Switch to automatically undo the
action after the error is gone.
24.1.1 CPU Protection Overview
Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information. If a
switch receives large numbers of control packets, such as ARP, BPDU or IGMP packets, which are to be
processed by the CPU, the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular tasks
properly.
The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP, BPDU and IGMP packets to be delivered
to the CPU on a port. This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS attacks or
errors from other network(s). You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed the specified
rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received.
24.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview
Some features, such as loop guard or CPU protection, allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard
specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port. For example, if the Switch detects that
packets sent out the port(s) loop back to the Switch, the Switch can shut down the port(s)
automatically. After that, you need to enable the port(s) or allow the packets on a port manually via the
web configurator or the commands. With error-disable recovery, you can set the disabled port(s) to
become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you specify.
24.1.3 What You Can Do
• Use the Errdisable Status screen (Section 24.3 on page 186) to view whether the Switch detected that
control packets exceeded the rate limit configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the
feature requirements and what action you configure, and related information.
• Use the CPU Protection screen (Section 24.4 on page 188) to limit the maximum number of control
packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port.
• Use the Errdisable Detect screen (Section 24.5 on page 189) to have the Switch detect whether the
control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the
limit is exceeded.
• Use the Errdisable Recovery screen (Section 24.6 on page 190) to set the Switch to automatically
undo an action after the error is gone.
Chapter 24 Error Disable
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
186
24.2 Error Disable Screen
Use this screen to go to the screens where you can configure error disable related settings. Click
Advanced Application > Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 138 Advanced Application > Errdisable
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.3 Error-Disable Status
Use this screen to view whether the Switch detected that control packets exceeded the rate limit
configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the feature requirements and what action you
configure, and related information. Click the Click here link next to Errdisable Status in the Advanced
Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 83 Advanced Application > Errdisable
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Errdisable Status Click this link to view whether the Switch detected that control packets exceeded the rate
limit configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the feature requirements and
what action you configure, and related information.
CPU protection Click this link to limit the maximum number of control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP)
that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port.
Errdisable Detect Click this link to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit
configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded.
Errdisable Recovery Click this link to set the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone.
Chapter 24 Error Disable
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
187
Figure 139 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 84 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inactive-reason
mode reset
Port List Enter the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma) on which you want to reset inactive-
reason status.
Cause Select the cause of inactive-reason mode you want to reset here.
Reset Press to reset the specified port(s) to handle ARP, BPDU or IGMP packets instead of ignoring
them, if the port(s) is in inactive-reason mode.
Errdisable Status
Port This is the number of the port on which you want to configure Errdisable Status.
Cause This displays the type of the control packet received on the port or the feature enabled on the
port and causing the Switch to take the specified action.
Active This field displays whether the control packets (ARP, BPDU, and/or IGMP) on the port is being
detected or not. It also shows whether loop guard, anti-arp scanning, BPDU guard or ZULD is
enabled on the port.
Chapter 24 Error Disable
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
188
24.4 CPU Protection Configuration
Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the
Switch can receive or transmit on a port. Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the
Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Note: After you configure this screen, make sure you also enable error detection for the
specific control packets in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable D ete ct
screen.
Figure 140 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
Mode This field shows the action that the Switch takes for the cause.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port.
•inactive-reason - The Switch drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU) on the
port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port(s) has to handle in
every one second.
Rate This field displays how many control packets this port can receive or transmit per second. It can
be adjusted in CPU Protection. 0 means no rate limit.
Status This field displays the errdisable status
•Forwarding: The Switch is forwarding packets. Rate-limitation mode is always in Forwarding
status.
•Err-disable: The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received
(inactive-port) or drops specified control packets on the port (inactive-reason)
Recovery
Time Left This field displays the time (seconds) left before the port(s) becomes active of Errdisable
Recovery.
Total
Dropped This field displays the total packet number dropped by this port where the packet rate exceeds
the rate of mode rate-limitation.
Table 84 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Error Disable
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
189
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration
Use this screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured
for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded. Click the Click Here link next to
Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 141 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 85 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Rate Limit (pkt/s) Enter a number from 0 to 256 to specify how many control packets this port can receive or
transmit per second.
0 means no rate limit.
You can configure the action that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded. See Section 24.5
on page 189 for detailed information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 86 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for a specific control
packet is exceeded and take the action selected below.
Chapter 24 Error Disable
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
190
24.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration
Use this screen to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone. Click the
Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display
the screen as shown.
Figure 142 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate
limit on a port, set in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection screen.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received.
•inactive-reason - The Switch drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU) on the
port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port(s) has to handle in
every one second.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 86 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 87 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to turn on the error-disable recovery function on the Switch.
Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard
packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you configure.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Timer Status Select this check box to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port
or allow specific packets on a port, after the error was gone. Clear the check box to turn off this
rule.
Chapter 24 Error Disable
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
191
Interval Enter the number of seconds (from 30 to 2592000) for the time interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 87 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
192
CHAPTER 25
Green Ethernet
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to reduce the power consumed by switch ports.
25.1 Green Ethernet Overview
Green Ethernet reduces switch port power consumption in the following ways.
IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
If EEE is enabled, both sides of a link support EEE and there is no traffic, the port enters Low Power Idle
(LPI) mode. LPI mode turns off some functions of the physical layer (becomes quiet) to save power.
Periodically the port transmits a REFRESH signal to allow the link partner to keep the link alive. When there
is traffic to be sent, a WAKE signal is sent to the link partner to return the link to active mode.
Auto Power Down
Auto Power Down turns off almost all functions of the port’s physical layer functions when the link is
down, so the port only uses power to check for a link up pulse from the link partner. After the link up
pulse is detected, the port wakes up from Auto Power Down and operates normally.
Short Reach
Traditional Ethernet transmits all data with enough power to reach the maximum cable length. Shorter
cables lose less power, so Short Reach saves power by adjusting the transmit power of each port
according to the length of cable attached to that port.
25.2 Configuring Green Ethernet
Click Advanced Application > Green Ethernet in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Note: EEE, Auto Power Down and Short Reach are not supported on an uplink port.
Chapter 25 Green Ethernet
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
193
Figure 143 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 88 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet globally.
Auto Power
Down
Select this to activate Auto Power Down globally.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach globally.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet on this port.
Auto Power
Down
Select this to activate Auto Power Down on this port.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
194
CHAPTER 26 31
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP)
26.1 LLDP Overview
The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a layer 2 protocol. It allows a network device to advertise its
identity and capabilities on the local network. It also allows the device to maintain and store information
from adjacent devices which are directly connected to the network device. This helps an administrator
discover network changes and perform necessary network reconfiguration and management. The
device information is encapsulated in the LLDPDUs (LLDP data units) in the form of TLV (Type, Length,
Value). Device information carried in the received LLDPDUs is stored in the standard MIB.
The Switch supports these basic management TLVs.
• End of LLDPDU (mandatory)
•Chassis ID (mandatory)
•Port ID (mandatory)
• Time to Live (mandatory)
• Port Description (optional)
• System Name (optional)
• System Description (optional)
• System Capabilities (optional)
• Management Address (optional)
The Switch also supports the IEEE 802.1 and IEEE 802.3 organizationally-specific TLVs.
IEEE 802.1 specific TLVs:
• Port VLAN ID TLV (optional)
• Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV (optional)
IEEE 802.3 specific TLVs:
• MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV (optional)
• Power via MDI TLV (optional, For PoE models only)
• Link Aggregation TLV (optional)
• Maximum Frame Size TLV (optional)
The optional TLVs are inserted between the Time To Live TLV and the End of LLDPDU TLV.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
195
The next figure demonstrates that the network devices Switches and Routers (S and R) transmit and
receive device information via LLDPDU and the network manager can query the information using
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Figure 144 LLDP Overview
26.2 LLDP-MED Overview
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices) is an extension to the standard
LLDP developed by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR-41.4 subcommittee which
defines the enhanced discovery capabilities, such as VoIP applications, to enable network
administrators manage their network topology application more efficiently. Unlike the traditional LLDP,
which has some limitations when handling multiple application devices, the LLDP-MED offers display of
accurate physical topology, interoperability of devices, and easy trouble shooting for misconfigured IP
addresses. There are three classes of endpoint devices that the LLDP-MED supports:
Class I: IP Communications Controllers or other communication related servers
Class II: Voice Gateways, Conference Bridges or Media Servers
Class III: IP-Phones, PC-based Softphones, End user Communication Appliances supporting IP Media
The following figure shows that with the LLDP-MED, network connectivity devices (NCD) like Switches
and Routers will transmit LLDP TLV to endpoint device (ED) like IP Phone first (1), to get its device type
and capabilities information, then it will receive that information in LLDP-MED TLV back from endpoint
devices (2), after that the network connectivity devices will transmit LLDP-MED TLV (3) to provision the
endpoint device to such that the endpoint device’s network policy and location identification
information is updated. Since LLDPDU updates status and configuration information periodically,
network managers may check the result of provision via remote status. The remote status is updated by
receiving LLDP-MED TLVs from endpoint devices.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
196
Figure 145 LLDP-MED Overview
26.3 LLDP Screens
Click Advanced Application > LLDP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 146 Advanced Application > LLDP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 89 Advanced Application > LLDP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LLDP
LLDP Local
Status Click here to show a screen with the Switch’s LLDP information.
LLDP Remote
Status Click here to show a screen with LLDP information from the neighboring devices.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
197
26.4 LLDP Local Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status on this Switch. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP
Local Status to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 147 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LLDP
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP parameters.
LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices) parameters.
LLDP-MED
Network Policy Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices) network policy parameters.
LLDP-MED
Location Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices) location parameters.
Table 89 Advanced Application > LLDP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
198
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status for each port on this Switch. Click Advanced Application > LLDP
> LLDP Local Status and then, click a port number, for example 1 in the local port column to display the
screen as shown next.
Table 90 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Basic TLV
Chassis ID TLV This displays the chassis ID of the local Switch, that is the Switch you’re configuring. The
chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype.
Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the chassis of the Switch is identified.
Chassis ID - This displays the chassis ID of the local Switch.
System Name
TLV This shows the host name of the Switch.
System
Description TLV This shows the firmware version of the Switch.
System
Capabilities TLV This shows the System Capabilities enabled and supported on the local Switch.
• System Capabilities Supported - Bridge
• System Capabilities Enabled - Bridge
Management
Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent
that may be used to reach higher layer entities to assist discovery by network management.
The TLV may also include the system interface number and an object identifier (OID) that are
associated with this management address
This field displays the Management Address settings on the specified port(s).
•Management Address Subtype - ipv4 / all-802
•Interface Number Subtype - unknown
•Interface Number - 0 (not supported)
•Object Identifier - 0 (not supported)
LLDP Port
Information
This displays the local port information.
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch port which receives the LLDPDU from the remote
device. Click a port number to view the detailed LLDP status on this port in the LLDP Local
Port Status Detail screen.
Port ID Subtype This indicates how the port ID field is identified.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the specific identifier for the port from which this
LLDPDU was transmitted.
Port Description This shows the port description that the Switch will advertise from this port.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
199
Figure 148 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
200
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 91 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch’s port.
Basic TLV These are the Basic TLV flags
Port ID TLV The port ID TLV identifies the specific port that transmitted the LLDP frame.
•Port ID Subtype: This shows how the port is identified.
•Port ID: This is the ID of the port.
Port Description
TLV This displays the local port description.
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VLAN ID sent by the IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID TLV.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of the
sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the sending node.
Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-negotiation during link
initiation or manual override.
•AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
•AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
•AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
•Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
•• Aggregation Capability - The current aggregation capability of the port.
•• Aggregation Status - The current aggregation status of the port.
•• Aggregation Port ID - The aggregation ID of the current port.
Max Frame Size
TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of LLDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED enables advertisement and discovery
of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location databases, and
information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities TLV This field displays which LLDP-MED TLV are capable to transmit on the Switch.
• Network Policy
• Location
• Extend Power via MDI PSE
• Extend Power via MDI PD
• Inventory Management
Device Type
TLV This is the LLDP-MED device class. The Zyxel Switch device type is:
• Network Connectivity
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
201
26.5 LLDP Remote Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status for each LLDP connection to a neighboring Switch. Click
Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Click Here) to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 149 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voice-Signaling
•Guest-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its ELIN (Emergency Location Identifier
Number) or the IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic
Address LCI).
•Coordinate-based LCI - latitude, longitude and altitude coordinates of the location
Configuration Information (LCI)
•Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
•ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
Table 91 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 92 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index The index number shows the number of remote devices that are connected to the Switch.
Click on an index number to view the detailed LLDP status for this remote device in the LLDP
Remote Port Status Detail screen.
Local Port This is the number of the Switch’s port that received LLDPDU from the remote device.
Chassis ID This displays the chassis ID of the remote device associated with the transmitting LLDP agent.
The chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype. For example, the MAC address of the
remote device.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the specific identifier for the port from which this
LLDPDU was transmitted. The port ID is identified by the port ID subtype.
Port Description This displays a description for the port from which this LLDPDU was transmitted.
System Name This displays the system name of the remote device.
Management
Address
This displays the management address of the remote device. It could be the MAC address or
IP address.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
202
26.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status of the remote device connected to the Switch. Click Advanced
Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Click Here) and then click an index number, for example 1, in
the Index column in the LLDP Remote Status screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 150 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Basic
TLV)
The following table describes the labels in Basic TLV part of the screen.
Table 93 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Basic
TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch’s port to which the remote device is connected.
Basic TLV
Chassis ID TLV • Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the chassis of the remote device is identified.
•Chassis ID - this displays the chassis ID of the remote device. The chassis ID is identified by
the chassis ID subtype.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
203
Port ID TLV • Port ID Subtype - this displays how the port of the remote device is identified.
•Port ID - this displays the port ID of the remote device. The port ID is identified by the port
ID subtype.
Time To Live TLV This displays the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device information on the
neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires. The TTL
value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP frames transmitting interval.
Port Description
TLV This displays the remote port description.
System Name
TLV This displays the system name of the remote device.
System
Description TLV This displays the system description of the remote device.
System
Capabilities TLV This displays whether the system capabilities are enabled and supported on the remote
device.
• System Capabilities Supported
• System Capabilities Enabled
Management
Address TLV This displays the following management address parameters of the remote device.
• Management Address Subtype
• Management Address
• Interface Number Subtype
• Interface Number
• Object Identifier
Table 93 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Basic
TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
204
Figure 151 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail> (Dot
1 and Dot3 TLV)
The following table describes the labels in the Dot1 and Dot3 parts of the screen.
Table 94 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Dot1
and Dot3 TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VLAN ID of this port on the remote device.
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLV, which indicates whether the VLAN ID
and whether it is enabled and supported on the port of remote Switch which sent the
LLDPDU.
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Supported
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Enabled
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
205
Vlan Name TLV This shows the VLAN ID and name for remote device port.
•VLAN ID
• VLAN Name
Protocol
Identity TLV The Protocol Identity TLV allows the Switch to advertise the particular protocols that are
accessible through its port.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of the
sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the sending node.
Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-negotiation during link
initiation or manual override.
•AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
•AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
•AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
•Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
•Aggregation Capability - The current aggregation capability of the port.
•Aggregation Status - The current aggregation status of the port.
•Aggregation Port ID - The aggregation ID of the current port.
Power Via MDI
TLV The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI
power support capabilities of the sending port on the remote device.
•Port Class
• MDI Supported
• MDI Enabled
• Pair Controllable
• PSE Power Pairs
•Power Class
Max Frame Size
TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
Table 94 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Dot1
and Dot3 TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
206
Figure 152 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (MED
TLV)
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
207
The following table describes the labels in the MED TLV part of the screen.
Table 95 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (MED
TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of LLDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED enables advertisement and discovery
of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location databases, and
information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities TLV This displays the MED capabilities the remote port supports.
• Network Policy
• Location
• Extend Power via MDI PSE
• Extend Power via MDI PD
• Inventory Management
Device Type
TLV LLDP-MED endpoint device classes:
• Endpoint Class I
• Endpoint Class II
• Endpoint Class III
• Network Connectivity
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voice-Signaling
•Guest-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its:
•Coordinate-base LCI - latitude and longitude coordinates of the Location Configuration
Information (LCI)
•Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
•ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
Inventory TLV The majority of IP Phones lack support of management protocols such as SNMP, so LLDP-MED
inventory TLVs are used to provide their inventory information to the Network Connectivity
Devices such as the Switch. The Inventory TLV may contain the following information.
• Hardware Revision
• Software Revision
•Firmware Revision
• Model Name
• Manufacturer
• Serial Number
•Asset ID
Extended
Power via MDI
TLV
Extended Power Via MDI Discovery enables detailed power information to be advertised by
Media Endpoints, such as IP phones and Network Connectivity Devices such as the Switch.
•Power Type - whether it is currently operating from primary power or is on backup power
(backup power may indicate to the Endpoint Device that it should move to a power
conservation mode).
•Power Source - whether or not the Endpoint is currently operating from an external power
source.
•Power Priority - the Endpoint Device’s power priority (which the Network Connectivity
Device may use to prioritize which devices will remain in service during power shortages)
•Power Value - power requirement, in fractions of Watts, in current configuration
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
208
26.6 LLDP Configuration
Use this screen to configure global LLDP settings on the Switch. Click Advanced Application > LLDP >
LLDP Configuration (Click Here) to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 153 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 96 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable LLDP on the Switch. It is enabled by default.
Transmit Interval Enter how many seconds the Switch waits before sending LLDP packets.
Transmit Hold Enter the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device information on the
neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires. The TTL
value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP packets transmitting interval.
Transmit Delay Enter the delay (in seconds) between successive LLDPDU transmissions initiated by value or
status changes in the Switch MIB.
Reinitialize Delay Enter the number of seconds for LLDP to wait before initializing on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
209
26.6.1 LLDP Configuration Basic TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure Basic TLV settings. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
(Click Here) > Basic TLV Setting to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 154 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Basic TLV Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Admin Status Select whether LLDP transmission and/or reception is allowed on this port.
•Disable - not allowed
•Tx-Only - transmit only
•Rx-Only - receive only
•Tx-Rx - transmit and receive
Notification Select whether LLDP notification is enabled on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 96 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 97 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Basic TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Management
Address
Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Management Address TLVs on
the port(s).
Port Description Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Port Description TLVs on the
port(s).
System Capabilities Select the check box(es) to enable or to disable the sending of System Capabilities TLVs on
the port(s).
System Description Select the check box(es) to enable or to disable the sending of System Description TLVs on
the port(s).
System Name Select the check box(es) to enable or to disable the sending of System Name TLVs on the
port(s).
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
210
26.6.2 LLDP Configuration Org-specific TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure organization-specific TLV settings. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP
Configuration (Click Here) > Org-specific TLV Setting to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 155 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Org-specific TLV Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 97 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Basic TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 98 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID TLVs on
the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by default.
Dot3 TLV
Link
Aggregation Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation TLVs
on the port(s).
MAC/PHY Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY
Configuration/Status TLVs on the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by
default.
Max Frame Size Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Max Frame Size TLVs
on the port(s).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
211
26.7 LLDP-MED Configuration
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 156 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy (Click Here) to display the screen as
shown next.
Table 99 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. Select * to configure all ports simultaneously.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Notification
Topology
Change Select to enable LLDP-MED topology change traps on this port.
MED TLV Setting
Location Select to enable transmitting LLDP-MED location TLV.
Network Policy Select to enable transmitting LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
212
Figure 157 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 100 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port number to set up the LLDP-MED network policy.
Application Type Select the type of application used in the network policy.
•voice
• voice-signaling
•guest-voice
• guest-voice-signaling
•softphone-voice
• video-conferencing
• streaming-video
• video-signaling
Tag Select to tag or untag in the network policy.
•tagged
• untagged
VLAN Enter the VLAN ID number. It should be from 1 to 4094. For priority tagged frames, enter “0”.
DSCP Enter the DSCP value of the network policy. The value is defined from 0 through 63 with the 0
representing use of the default DSCP value.
Priority Enter the priority value for the network policy.
Add Click Add after finish entering the network policy information. A summary table will list all the
Switch you’ve added.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the information afresh.
Index This field displays the of index number of the network policy. Click an index number to edit
the rule.
Port This field displays the port number of the network policy.
Application Type This field displays the application type of the network policy.
Tag This field displays the Tag Status of the network policy.
VLAN This field displays the VLANID of the network policy.
Priority This field displays the priority value of the network policy.
DSCP This field displays the DSCP value of the network policy.
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
213
26.9 LLDP-MED Location
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location (Click Here) to display the screen as shown
next.
Figure 158 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rules that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
Table 100 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
214
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 101 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port number you want to set up the location within the LLDP-MED network.
Location
Coordinates
The LLDP-MED uses geographical coordinates and Civic Address to set the location
information of the remote device. Geographical based coordinates includes latitude,
longitude, altitude and datum. Civic Address includes Country, State, County, City, Street
and other related information.
Latitude Enter the latitude information. The value should be from 0º to 90º. The negative value
represents the South.
•north
•south
Longitude Enter the longitude information. The value should be from 0º to 180º. The negative value
represents the West.
•west
•east
Altitude Enter the altitude information. The value should be from -2097151 to 2097151 in meters or in
floors.
•meters
•floor
Datum Select the appropriate geodetic datum used by GPS.
•WGS84
• NAD83-NAVD88
• NAD83-MLLW
Civic Address Enter the Civic Address by providing information such as Country, State, County, City, Street,
Number, ZIP code and other additional information. Enter at least two field in this
configuration including the Country. The valid length of the Country field is 2 characters and
all other fields are up to 32 characters.
• Country
• State
• County
• City
• Division
• Neighbor
• Street
•Leading-Street-Direction
• Street-Suffix
• Trailing-Street-Suffix
•House-Number
• House-Number-Suffix
• Landmark
•Additional-Location
•Name
•Zip-Code
• Building
•Unit
• Floor
• Room-Number
• Place-Type
• Postal-Community-Name
• Post-Office-Box
• Additional-Code
Chapter 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
215
ELIN Number Enter a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN identifier which is used during
emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. The valid length is
from 10 to 25 characters.
Add Click Add after finish entering the location information.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the location information afresh.
Index This lists the index number of the location configuration. Click an index number to view or edit
the location.
Port This lists the port number of the location configuration.
Location
Coordinates
This field displays the location configuration information based on geographical coordinates
that includes longitude, latitude, altitude and datum.
Civic Address This field displays the Civic Address for the remote device using information such as Country,
State, County, City, Street, Number, ZIP code and additional information.
ELIN Number This field shows the Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), which is used to
identify endpoint devices when they issue emergency call services. The valid length is form
10 to 25 characters.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the locations that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
Table 101 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
216
CHAPTER 27
Auto PD Recovery
27.1 Overview
Things can go wrong with any network devices. A PD may slow down or freeze and need to be restarted
if it is overworked or a bug causes a memory leak. When a connected PD ceases to respond, Auto PD
Recovery allows the Switch to restart the PD by turning it off and on again.
27.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Auto PD Recovery screen (Section 27.2 on page 216) to enable and configure auto PD recovery
on the Switch.
27.2 Auto PD Recovery
This screen lets you turn on auto PD recovery on the Switch and its Ethernet ports. You can configure
whether the Switch uses LLDP or ping to check current status of a connected PD. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > Auto PD Recovery.
Figure 159 Advanced Application > Auto PD Recovery
Chapter 27 Auto PD Recovery
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
217
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 102 Advanced Application > Auto PD Recovery
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable Auto PD Recovery on the Switch.
Port This field displays the index number of a port on the switch.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select Active to enable Auto PD Recovery on the port.
Mode Select LLDP to have the Switch passively monitor current status of the connected PD by
reading LLDP packets from the PD on the port.
Select Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address of the connected PD to test whether the
PD is reachable or not.
Neighbor If Mode is set to LLDP, the system name of the connected PD displays automatically.
If Mode is set to Ping, enter the connected PD’s IPv4 or IPv6 address to which the Switch sends
ping requests.
Polling Interval Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for a response before sending another ping
request.
Polling Count Specify how many times the Switch is to resend a ping request before considering the PD
unreachable.
Action Set the action to take when the connected PD has stopped responding.
Select Reboot-Alarm to have the Switch turn OFF the power of the connected PD and turn it
back ON again to restart the PD after sending an SNMP trap and generating a log message.
Select Alarm to have the Switch send an SNMP trap and generate a log message.
Resume Polling
Interval
Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits before monitoring the PD status again after it
restarts the PD on the port.
PD Reboot Count Specify how many times the Switch attempts to restart the PD on the port.
Resume Power
Interval
Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits before supplying power to the connected PD
again after it restarts the PD on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
218
CHAPTER 28
Differentiated Services
28.1 DiffServ Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services (DiffServ) on the Switch.
Quality of Service (QoS) is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are
given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet
types.
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop
treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and
traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired.
This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently
depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for
every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced
notice of where the traffic is going.
28.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the DiffServ screen (Section 28.2 on page 219) to activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE
802.1p priority mapping on the Switch.
• Use the DSCP Setting screen (Section 28.3.1 on page 221) to change the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping.
28.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on Differentiated Services that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP
header. The DS field contains a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the
remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused (CU). The following figure illustrates the DS field.
Figure 160 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets as it is forwarded across
the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different
priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the
configured policies.
DSCP (6 bits) CU (2 bits)
Chapter 28 Differentiated Services
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
219
DiffServ Network Example
The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ-
compliant network devices. The boundary node (A in Figure 161) in a DiffServ network classifies (marks
with a DSCP value) the incoming packets into different traffic flows (Platinum, Gold, Silver, Bronze)
based on the configured marking rules. A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to
the traffic flows. An example traffic policy, is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over
others. In our example, packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion
occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network.
Figure 161 DiffServ Network
28.2 Activating DiffServ
Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802.1p priority mapping on the Switch.
Click IP Application > DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 28 Differentiated Services
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
220
Figure 162 IP Application > DiffServ
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
28.3 DSCP Settings
You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on
the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802.1p mapping table.
The following table shows the default DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping.
Table 103 IP Application > DiffServ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch.
Port This field displays the index number of a port on the switch.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the
common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select Active to enable Diffserv on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 104 Default DSCP-IEEE 802.1p Mapping
DSCP VALUE 0 – 7 8 – 15 16 – 23 24 – 31 32 – 39 40 – 47 48 – 55 56 – 63
IEEE 802.1p01234567
Chapter 28 Differentiated Services
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
221
28.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings
To change the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the
screen as shown next.
Figure 163 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 105 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
0 … 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number.
To set the IEEE 802.1p priority mapping, select the priority level from the drop-down list box.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it
is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to
the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
222
CHAPTER 29
DHCP
29.1 DHCP Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual computers to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. If you configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent,
then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network. If you don’t configure the
Switch as a DHCP relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client
computers or else the client computers must be configured manually.
29.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the DHCPv4 Status screen (Section 29.3 on page 223) to display the relay mode.
• Use the DHCPv4 Relay screen (Section 29.4 on page 223) to enable and configure global DHCPv4
relay.
• Use the VLAN Setting screen (Section 29.4.6 on page 229) to configure your DHCPv4 settings based on
the VLAN domain of the DHCPv4 clients.
• Use the DHCPv6 Relay screen (Section 29.5 on page 232) to enable and configure DHCPv6 relay.
29.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on DHCP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
DHCP Modes
If there is already a DHCP server on your network, then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay
agent. When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network, it contacts the DHCP
server for the necessary IP information, and then relays the assigned information back to the computer.
DHCPv4 Configuration Options
The DHCPv4 configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens. The screen you should
use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network.
Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria:
•Global - The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server.
•VLAN - The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis. The Switch can be configured to relay
DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN.
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
223
29.2 DHCP Configuration
Click IP Application > DHCP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click the link next to
DHCPv4 to open screens where you can enable and configure DHCPv4 relay settings and create option
82 profiles. Click the link next to DHCPv6 to open a screen where you can configure DHCPv6 relay
settings.
Figure 164 IP Application > DHCP
29.3 DHCPv4 Status
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel. The DHCP Status screen displays.
Figure 165 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.4 DHCPv4 Relay
Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same
broadcast domain. During the initial IP address leasing, the Switch helps to relay network information
(such as the IP address and subnet mask) between a DHCP client and a DHCP server. Once the DHCP
client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network, network information renewal is done
between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch.
Table 106 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Relay Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch’s DHCP relay mode.
Relay Mode This field displays:
None - if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent.
Global - if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only.
VLAN - followed by a VLAN ID or multiple VLAN IDs if it is configured as a relay agent for specific
VLAN(s).
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
224
The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay. This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP
requests from all domains to the same DHCP server. You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP
information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients.
29.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information
The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server
by adding Relay Agent Information. This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests.
The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information. Please refer to RFC 3046 for
more details.
The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field (also known as the Option
82 field) to DHCP requests. The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that
the Switch relays to a DHCP server.
Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option. You can
change the System Name in Basic Settings > General Setup.
The following describes the DHCP relay agent information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server:
29.4.1.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information Format
A DHCP Relay Agent Information option has the following format.
i1, i2 and iN are DHCP relay agent sub-options, which contain additional information about the DHCP
client. You need to define at least one sub-option.
29.4.1.2 Sub-Option Format
There are two types of sub-option: “Agent Circuit ID Sub-option” and “Agent Remote ID Sub-option”.
They have the following formats.
Table 107 Relay Agent Information
FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION
Slot ID (1 byte) This value is always 0 for stand-alone switches.
Port ID (1 byte) This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to.
VLAN ID (2 bytes) This is the VLAN that the port belongs to.
Information (up to 64 bytes) This optional, read-only field is set according to system name set in Basic
Settings > General Setup.
Table 108 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Format
Code
(82)
Length
(N)
i1 i2
...
iN
Table 109 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
1
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Slot ID, Port ID, VLAN ID, System Name or String
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
225
The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option and 2 identifies this as an Agent
Remote ID sub-option. The next field specifies the length of the field.
29.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile
Use this screen to create DHCPv4 option 82 profiles. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the
navigation panel and click the Option 82 Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 166 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 110 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
2
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
MAC Address or String
Table 111 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes. You can use up to 32 ASCII
characters. Spaces are allowed.
Circuit-ID Use this section to configure the Circuit ID sub-option to include information that is specific to
the relay agent (the Switch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch add the Circuit ID sub-option to client DHCP requests that it
relays to a DHCP server.
slot-port Select this option to have the Switch add the number of port that the DHCP client is connected
to.
vlan Select this option to have the Switch add the ID of VLAN which the port belongs to.
hostname This is the system name you configure in the Basic Setting > General Setup screen.
Select this option for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it
relays to a DHCP server.
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
226
29.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay
Use this screen to configure global DHCPv4 relay. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the
navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 167 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the client DHCP requests.
Spaces are allowed.
Remote-ID Use this section to configure the Remote ID sub-option to include information that identifies the
relay agent (the Switch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch append the Remote ID sub-option to the option 82 field of
DHCP requests.
mac Select this option to have the Switch add its MAC address to the client DHCP requests that it
relays to a DHCP server.
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters for the remote ID information in this field. Spaces are
allowed.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile. Click the name to change the settings.
Circuit-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Circuit ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Circuit ID sub-option.
Remote-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Remote ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Remote ID sub-option.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check box(es).
Table 111 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
227
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.4.4 Configure DHCPv4 Global Relay Port
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports on the Switch. To open this
screen, click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port.
Figure 168 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 112 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable DHCPv4 relay.
Remote DHCP
Server 1 .. 3
Enter the IP address of a DHCPv4 server in dotted decimal notation.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCPv4 option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports. The Switch
adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the profile to DHCP
requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 113 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82 profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For example,
enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified port(s). The
Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the profile to
DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
228
29.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example
The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the
VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains. There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both
domains.
Figure 169 Global DHCP Relay Network Example
Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown. Make sure you select a DHCP option 82 profile (default1 in
this example) to set the Switch to send additional information (such as the VLAN ID) together with the
DHCP requests to the DHCP server. This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address
according to the VLAN ID.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable, to clear
the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s).
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Table 113 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
229
Figure 170 DHCP Relay Configuration Example
29.4.6 Configure DHCPv4 VLAN Setting
Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients. Click IP
Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel, then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen
that displays.
Note: You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure
DHCP settings for on the Switch. See Section 5.1.3 on page 66 for information on how to
do this.
Figure 171 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
EXAMPLE
Table 114 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply.
Remote DHCP
Server 1 .. 3
Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports in this VLAN. The
Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the profile to
DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
230
29.4.7 Configure DHCPv4 VLAN Port
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this screen,
click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port.
Figure 172 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply.
Type This field displays Relay for the DHCP mode.
DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration, this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the IP
address pool.
For DHCP relay configuration, this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 114 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 115 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82 profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For example,
enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
231
29.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
The following example displays two VLANs (VIDs 1 and 2) for a campus network. Two DHCP servers are
installed to serve each VLAN. The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms
(VLAN 1) to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192.168.1.100. Requests from the academic buildings
(VLAN 2) are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172.16.10.100.
Figure 173 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
For the example network, configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified port(s) in this
VLAN. The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the
profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable, to
clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s) in this VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Table 115 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
232
Figure 174 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example
29.5 DHCPv6 Relay
A DHCPv6 relay agent is on the same network as the DHCPv6 clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCPv6 server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCPv6 server on its network, it then needs a DHCPv6 relay agent
to send a message to a DHCPv6 server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCPv6 relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such
as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to
the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the
relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCPv6 server copies the interface-ID option from the
Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID
should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Use this screen to configure DHCPv6 relay settings for a specific VLAN on the Switch. Click IP Application
> DHCP > DHCPv6 in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 29 DHCP
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
233
Figure 175 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 116 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Helper Address Enter the remote DHCPv6 server address for the specified VLAN.
Options
Interface ID Select this option to have the Switch add the interface-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests from
the clients in the specified VLAN before the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Remote ID Enter a string of up to 64 printable characters to be carried in the remote-ID option. The Switch
adds the remote-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests from the clients in the specified VLAN before
the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID number. Click the VLAN ID to change the settings.
Helper Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the remote DHCPv6 server for this VLAN.
Interface ID This field displays whether the interface-ID option is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients in this
VLAN.
Remote ID This field displays whether the remote-ID option is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients in this
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
234
CHAPTER 30
ARP Setup
30.1 ARP Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to
a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area
network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP
table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
30.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the ARP Learning screen (Section 30.2.1 on page 236) to configure ARP learning mode on a per-port
basis.
30.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on ARP that can help you configure the screen in this chapter.
30.1.2.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch, the
Switch looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The
Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of
the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field
(FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of
the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the
target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the
requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the
MAC address that replied.
30.1.2.2 ARP Learning Mode
The Switch supports three ARP learning modes: ARP-Reply, Gratuitous-ARP, and ARP-Request.
ARP-Reply
The Switch in ARP-Reply learning mode updates the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP
requests sent by the Switch. This can help prevent ARP spoofing.
In the following example, the Switch does not have IP address and MAC address mapping information
for hosts A and B in its ARP table, and host A wants to ping host B. Host A sends an ARP request to the
Chapter 30 ARP Setup
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
235
Switch and then sends an ICMP request after getting the ARP reply from the Switch. The Switch finds no
matched entry for host B in the ARP table and broadcasts the ARP request to all the devices on the LAN.
When the Switch receives the ARP reply from host B, it updates its ARP table and also forwards host A’s
ICMP request to host B. After the Switch gets the ICMP reply from host B, it sends out an ARP request to
get host A’s MAC address and updates the ARP table with host A’s ARP reply. The Switch then can
forward host B’s ICMP reply to host A.
Gratuitous-ARP
A gratuitous ARP is an ARP request in which both the source and destination IP address fields are set to
the IP address of the device that sends this request and the destination MAC address field is set to the
broadcast address. There will be no reply to a gratuitous ARP request.
A device may send a gratuitous ARP packet to detect IP collisions. If a device restarts or its MAC address
is changed, it can also use gratuitous ARP to inform other devices in the same network to update their
ARP table with the new mapping information.
In Gratuitous-ARP learning mode, the Switch updates its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a
gratuitous ARP request.
ARP-Request
When the Switch is in ARP-Request learning mode, it updates the ARP table with both ARP replies,
gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests.
Chapter 30 ARP Setup
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
236
Therefore in the following example, the Switch can learn host A’s MAC address from the ARP request
sent by host A. The Switch then forwards host B’s ICMP reply to host A right after getting host B’s MAC
address and ICMP reply.
30.2 ARP Setup
Click IP Application > ARP Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click the link
next to ARP Learning to open a screen where you can set the ARP learning mode for each port.
Figure 176 IP Application > ARP Setup
30.2.1 ARP Learning
Use this screen to configure each port’s ARP learning mode. Click the link next to ARP Learning in the IP
Application > ARP Setup screen to display the screen as shown next.
Chapter 30 ARP Setup
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
237
Figure 177 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 117 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
ARP Learning
Mode
Select the ARP learning mode the Switch uses on the port.
Select ARP-Reply to have the Switch update the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP
requests sent by the Switch.
Select Gratuitous-ARP to have the Switch update its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a
gratuitous ARP request.
Select ARP-Request to have the Switch update the ARP table with both ARP replies, gratuitous
ARP requests and ARP requests.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
238
CHAPTER 31
Maintenance
31.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration
files.
31.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Maintenance screen (Section 31.2 on page 238) to manage firmware and your configuration
files.
• Use the Firmware Upgrade screen (Section 31.3 on page 241) to upload the latest firmware.
• Use the Restore Configuration screen (Section 31.4 on page 243) to upload a stored device
configuration file.
• Use the Backup Configuration screen (Section 31.5 on page 243) to save your configurations for later
use.
• Use the Erase Running-Configuration screen (Section 31.2.1 on page 240) to reset the configuration to
the Zyxel default configuration settings.
• Use the Save Configuration screen (Section 31.2.2 on page 240) to save the current configuration
settings to a specific configuration file on the Switch.
• Use the Reboot System screen (Section 31.2.3 on page 240) to restart the Switch without physically
turning the power off and load a specific configuration file.
• Use the Tech-Support screen (Section 31.6 on page 244) to create reports for customer support if
there are problems with the Switch.
31.2 The Maintenance Screen
Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files. Click Management > Maintenance in
the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
239
Figure 178 Management > Maintenance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 118 Management > Maintenance
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Firmware
Upgrade
Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen.
Restore
Configuration
Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen.
Backup
Configuration
Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen.
Erase Running-
Configuration
Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the Zyxel default configuration settings.
Save
Configuration
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch.
Click Custom Default to save the current configuration settings to a customized default file on
the Switch. This file can be used instead of the Zyxel factory default configuration file.
Reboot System Click Config 1 to reboot the Switch and load Configuration 1 on the Switch.
Click Config 2 to reboot the Switch and load Configuration 2 on the Switch.
Click Factory Default to reboot the Switch and load the Zyxel factory default configuration
settings on the Switch.
Click Custom Default to reboot the Switch and load a saved customized default file on the
Switch.
Note: Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the
current configuration on the Switch.
Current This field displays which configuration (Configuration 1 or Configuration 2) is currently operating
on the Switch.
Tech-Support Click Click Here to see the Tech-Support screen. You can set CPU and memory thresholds for
log reports and download related log reports for issue analysis. Log reports include CPU history
and utilization, crash and memory.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
240
31.2.1 Erase Running-Configuration
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the Zyxel default configuration settings.
1In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Erase Running-Configuration to clear all
Switch configuration information you configured and return to the Zyxel default configuration settings.
2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the Zyxel default configuration settings.
Figure 179 Erase Running-Configuration: Confirmation
3In the web configurator, click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take effect.
If you want to access the Switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP address of
your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address (192.168.1.1).
31.2.2 Save Configuration
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch.
These configurations are set up according to your network environment.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 2 on the Switch.
These configurations are set up according to your network environment.
Click Custom Default to save the current configuration settings permanently to a customized default file
on the Switch.
Note: If a customized default file was not saved, clicking Custom Default loads the factory
default configuration on the Switch.
Alternatively, click Save on the top right-hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes
to the current configuration.
Note: Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently. All
unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch.
31.2.3 Reboot System
Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off. It also allows you
to load configuration one (Config 1), configuration two (Config 2), a Custom Default or the factory
default configuration when you reboot. Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch.
1In the Maintenance screen, click a configuration button next to Reboot System to reboot and load that
configuration file. The following screen displays.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
241
Figure 180 Reboot System: Confirmation
2Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. This does not affect
the Switch’s configuration.
Click Config 1 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration one on the Switch.
Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch.
Click Factory Default and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load Zyxel factory default configuration
settings on the Switch.
Click Custom Default and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load a customized default file on the Switch.
This will save the custom default configuration settings to both Configuration 1 and Configuration 2.
31.3 Firmware Upgrade
Use the following screen to upgrade your Switch to the latest firmware. The Switch supports dual
firmware images, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2. Use this screen to specify which image is updated when
firmware is uploaded using the web configurator and to specify which image is loaded when the Switch
starts up.
Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to your
computer before uploading to the device.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
Click Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
242
Figure 181 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box
or click Choose File to locate it. Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot. Click Upgrade to
load the new firmware.
After the firmware upgrade process is complete, see the System Info screen to verify your current
firmware version number.
Table 119 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This is the name of the Switch that you’re configuring.
Version The Switch has two firmware sets, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2, residing in flash.
•Running shows the version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation date
of the firmware currently in use on the Switch (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2). The firmware
information is also displayed at System Information in Basic Settings.
•Firmware 1 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation
date.
•Firmware 2 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation
date.
Current Boot Image This displays which firmware is currently in use on the Switch (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2).
Config Boot Image Select which firmware (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2) should load, click Apply and reboot the
Switch to see changes, you will also see changes in the Current Boot Image field above as
well.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Firmware Choose to upload the new firmware to (Firmware) 1 or (Firmware) 2.
File Path Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File
Path text box or click Choose File or Browse to locate it.
Upgrade Click Upgrade to load the new firmware. Firmware upgrades are only applied after a
reboot. To reboot, go to Management > Maintenance > Reboot System and click Config 1,
Config 2 or Factory Default (Config 1, Config 2 and Factory Default are the configuration
files you want the Switch to use when it restarts).
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
243
31.4 Restore Configuration
Use this screen to restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch.
Figure 182 Management > Maintenance > Restore Configuration
Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click
Choose File to locate it. After you have specified the file, click Restore. "config" is the name of the
configuration file on the Switch, so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you
restore using this screen.
31.5 Backup Configuration
Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various “snap shots” of your device from
which you may restore at a later date.
Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen.
Figure 183 Management > Maintenance > Backup Configuration
Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen.
1Select which Switch configuration file you want to download to your computer.
2Click Backup.
3If the current configuration file is open and/or downloaded to your computer automatically, you can
click File > Save As to save the file to a specific place.
If a dialog box pops up asking whether you want to open or save the file, click Save or Save File to
download it to the default downloads folder on your computer. If a Save As screen displays after you
click Save or Save Fil e, choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop-down
list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click Save to save the configuration
file to your computer.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
244
31.6 Tech-Support
The Tech-Support feature is a log enhancement tool that logs useful information such as CPU utilization
history, memory and Mbuf (Memory Buffer) log and crash reports for issue analysis by customer support
should you have difficulty with your Switch. The Tech Support menu eases your effort in obtaining reports
and it is also available in CLI command by typing “Show tech-support” command.
Click Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support to see the following screen.
Figure 184 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
You may need WordPad or similar software to see the log report correctly. The table below describes
the fields in the above screen.
Table 120 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CPU Type a number ranging from 50 to 100 in the CPU threshold box, and type another
number ranging from 5 to 60 in the seconds box then click Apply.
For example, 80 for CPU threshold and 5 for seconds means a log will be created when
CPU utilization reaches over 80% and lasts for 5 seconds.
The log report holds 7 days of CPU log data and is stored in volatile memory (RAM). The
data is lost if the Switch is turned off or in event of power outage. After 7 days, the logs
wrap around and new ones and replace the earliest ones.
The higher the CPU threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less data
technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Mbuf Type a number ranging from 50 to 100 in the Mbuf (Memory Buffer) threshold box. The
Mbuf log report is stored in flash (permanent) memory.
For example, Mbuf 50 means a log will be created when the Mbuf utilization is over 50%.
The higher the Mbuf threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less data
technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
245
31.7 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
31.7.1 FTP Command Line
This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP
commands. First, understand the filename conventions.
31.7.2 Filename Conventions
The configuration file (also known as the romfile or ROM) contains the Zyxel factory default configuration
settings in the screens such as password, Switch setup, IP Setup, and so on. Once you have customized
the Switch’s settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.
ZyNOS (Zyxel Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system firmware
and has a “bin” filename extension.
31.7.2.1 Example FTP Commands
ftp> put firmware.bin ras
All Click Download to see all the log report and system status. This log report is stored in flash
memory. If the All log report is too large, you can download the log reports separately
below.
Crash Click Download to see the crash log report. The log will include information of the last
crash and is stored in flash memory.
CPU history Click Download to see the CPU history log report. The 7-days log is stored in RAM and you
will need to save it, otherwise it will be lost when the Switch is shutdown or during power
outage.
Memory Section Click Download to see the memory section log report. This log report is stored in flash
memory.
Mbuf Click Download to see the Mbuf log report. The log includes Mbuf over threshold
information. This log report is stored in flash memory.
ROM Click Download to see the Read Only Memory (ROM) log report. This report is stored in
flash memory.
Table 120 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 121 Filename Conventions
FILE TYPE INTERNAL NAME EXTERNAL NAME DESCRIPTION
Configuration File config *.cfg This is the configuration filename on the
Switch. Uploading the config file replaces
the specified configuration file system,
including your Switch configurations,
system-related data (including the default
password), the error log and the trace log.
Firmware ras *.bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS
firmware on the Switch.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
246
This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the Switch.
ftp> get config config.cfg
This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called “config.cfg” on your
computer.
If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will
need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes “config” and “ras”. Be sure you keep unaltered
copies of both files for later use.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
31.7.3 FTP Command Line Procedure
1Launch the FTP client on your computer.
2Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch.
3Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.
4Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).
5Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary.
6Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch, for example, put firmware.bin ras transfers
the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the Switch and renames it to “ras”. Similarly, put
config.cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.cfg) to the Switch and
renames it to “config”. Likewise get config config.cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch
to your computer and renames it to “config.cfg”. See Table 121 on page 245 for more information on
filename conventions.
7Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt.
31.7.4 GUI-based FTP Clients
The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients.
Table 122 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Host Address Enter the address of the host server.
Login Type Anonymous.
This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for
anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator
has enabled this option.
Normal.
The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.
Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode. Configuration and
firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.
Chapter 31 Maintenance
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
247
31.7.5 FTP Restrictions
FTP will not work when:
• FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen.
• The IP address(es) in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address. If it does
not match, the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately.
Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory (path).
Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory (path).
Table 122 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
248
CHAPTER 32
Access Control
32.1 Access Control Overview
This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch.
A console port and FTP are allowed one session each, Telnet and SSH share nine sessions, up to five Web
sessions (five different user names and passwords) and/or limitless SNMP access control sessions are
allowed.
A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi-login
is disabled. See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi-login.
32.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Access Control screen (Section 32.2 on page 248) to display the main screen.
• Use the SNMP screen (Section 32.3 on page 249) to configure your SNMP settings.
• Use the Trap Group screen (Section 32.3.1 on page 250) to specify the types of SNMP traps that should
be sent to each SNMP manager.
• Use the User Information screen (Section 32.3.3 on page 252) to create SNMP users for authentication
with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups.
• Use the Logins screens (Section 32.4 on page 254) to assign which users can access the Switch via
web configurator at any one time.
• Use the Service Access Control screen (Section 32.5 on page 256) to decide what services you may
use to access the Switch.
• Use the Remote Management screen (Section 32.6 on page 257) to specify a group of one or more
“trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
32.2 The Access Control Main Screen
Use this screen to display the main screen.
Click Management > Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown.
Table 123 Access Control Overview
Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP
One session Share up to nine sessions One session Up to five accounts No limit
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
249
Figure 185 Management > Access Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3 Configure SNMP
Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings.
Click Management > Access Control > SNMP to view the screen as shown.
Figure 186 Management > Access Control > SNMP
Table 124 Management > Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP Click this link to configure your SNMP settings.
Logins Click this link to assign which users can access the Switch via web configurator at any one
time.
Service Access
Control
Click this link to decide what services you may use to access the Switch.
Remote
Management
Click this link to specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an
administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
250
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.1 Configure SNMP Trap Group
From the SNMP screen, click Trap Group to view the screen as shown. Use the Trap Group screen to
specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager.
Table 125 Management > Access Control > SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community (password) values.
Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch. The SNMP version on the Switch must match the
version on the SNMP manager. Choose SNMP version 2c (v2c), SNMP version 3 (v3) or both
(v3v2c).
SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string, which is the password for the incoming Get- and GetNext-
requests from the management station.
The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Set Community Enter the Set Community, which is the password for incoming Set- requests from the
management station.
The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
manager.
The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch.
Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages.
IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to.
Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps.
Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap.
This username must match an existing account on the Switch (configured in the Management
> Access Control > SNMP > User screen).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
251
Figure 187 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.2 Enable/Disable Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port
From the SNMP > Trap Group screen, click Port to view the screen as shown. Use this screen to set
whether a trap received on the port(s) would be sent to the SNMP manager.
Table 126 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trap Destination IP Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses. These are the IP addresses of the
SNMP managers. You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting
screen.
Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager.
Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager.
Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station. See SNMP Traps
on page 260 for individual trap descriptions.
The traps are grouped by category. Selecting a category automatically selects all of the
category’s traps. Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch
to send to the SNMP station. Clearing a category’s check box automatically clears all of the
category’s trap check boxes (the Switch only sends traps from selected categories).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
252
Figure 188 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.3 Configure SNMP User
From the SNMP screen, click User to view the screen as shown. Use the User screen to create SNMP users
for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups. An SNMP user is
an SNMP manager.
Table 127 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Option Select the trap type you want to configure here.
Port This field displays a port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the trap type of SNMP traps on this port.
Clear this check box to disable the sending of SNMP traps on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
253
Figure 189 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 128 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Information Note: Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this
screen to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager.
Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch.
Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for SNMP
communication from this user. Choose:
•noauth -to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager. This is
equivalent to the Get, Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c. This is the lowest security
level.
•auth - to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user.
•priv - to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user.
This is the highest security level.
Note: The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or
higher than the security level settings on the Switch.
Authentication Select an authentication algorithm. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm)
are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data. SHA authentication is generally
considered stronger than MD5, but is slower.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication.
Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user. You can choose one
of the following:
•DES - Data Encryption Standard is a widely used (but breakable) method of data
encryption. It applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data.
•AES - Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses
a secret key. AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
254
32.4 Set Up Login Accounts
Up to five people (one administrator and four non-administrators) may access the Switch via web
configurator at any one time.
• An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes. The username for the
Administrator is always admin. The default administrator password is 1234.
Note: It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password (1234).
• A non-administrator (username is something other than admin) is someone who can view and/or
configure Switch settings. The configuration right varies depending on the user’s privilege level.
Click Management > Access Control > Logins to view the screen as shown.
Group SNMP v3 adopts the concept of View-based Access Control Model (VACM) group. SNMP
managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs. Specify in which SNMP
group this user is.
admin - Members of this group can perform all types of system configuration, including the
management of administrator accounts.
readwrite - Members of this group have read and write rights, meaning that the user can
create and edit the MIBs on the Switch, except the user account and AAA configuration.
readonly - Members of this group have read rights only, meaning the user can collect
information from the Switch.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is a read-only number identifying a login account on the Switch. Click on an index number
to view more details and edit an existing account.
Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch.
Security Level This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for SNMP
communication with this user.
Authentication This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP communication with this user.
Privacy This field displays the encryption method used for SNMP communication with this user.
Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 128 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
255
Figure 190 Management > Access Control > Logins
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 129 Management > Access Control > Logins
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default administrator
user name.
Old Password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Edit Logins
You may configure passwords for up to four users. These users can have read-only or read/write access. You can
give users higher privileges via the web configurator or the CLI. For more information on assigning privileges via the
CLI see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide.
User Name Set a user name (up to 32 ASCII characters long).
Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
256
32.5 Service Access Control
Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch. You may
also change the default service port and configure “trusted computer(s)” for each service in the
Remote Management screen (discussed later). Click Access Control to go back to the main Access
Control screen.
Figure 191 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Privilege Type the privilege level for this user. At the time of writing, users may have a privilege level of 0,
3, 13, or 14 representing different configuration rights as shown below.
• 0 - Display basic system information.
• 3 - Display configuration or status.
• 13 - Configure features except for login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the
authentication method sequence and authorization settings, multiple logins, administrator
and enable passwords, and configuration information display.
• 14 - Configure login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the authentication method
sequence and authorization settings, multiple logins, and administrator and enable
passwords, and display configuration information.
Users can run command lines if the session’s privilege level is greater than or equal to the
command’s privilege level. The session privilege initially comes from the privilege of the login
account. For example, if the user has a privilege of 5, he/she can run commands that requires
privilege level of 5 or less but not more.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 129 Management > Access Control > Logins (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 130 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here.
Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
257
32.6 Remote Management
Use this screen to specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may
use a service to manage the Switch.
Click Management > Access Control > Remote Management to view the screen as shown next.
You can specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a
service to manage the Switch. Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen.
Figure 192 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
Service Port For Telnet, SSH, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS services, you may change the default service port by typing
the new port number in the Service Port field. If you change the default port number then you
will have to let people (who wish to use the service) know the new port number for that
service.
Timeout Type how many minutes (from 1 to 255) a management session can be left idle before the
session times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle
timeouts may have security risks.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 130 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
258
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.7 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
32.7.1 About SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to manage and
monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management information between the
network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A manager station can manage and
monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version 1 (SNMPv1), SNMP version 2c or SNMP version
3. The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is
configured.
Figure 193 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
Table 131 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Entry This is the client set index number. A “client set” is a group of one or more “trusted computers”
from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set. Clear the check box if you wish to
temporarily disable the set without deleting it.
Start Address
End Address
Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this Switch.
The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches
the range set here. The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match.
Telnet/FTP/
HTTP/ICMP/
SNMP/SSH/
HTTPS
Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted computers.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
259
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch (the Switch). An agent
translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with
SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management
functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a Switch. Examples of variables include number of packets received,
node port status and so on. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects.
SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager
issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
SNMP v3 and Security
SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management. SNMP managers can be required to authenticate
with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions.
Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers.
Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages. When the contents of the SNMP messages are
encrypted, only the intended recipients can read them.
Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance.
The Switch supports the following MIBs:
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• RFC 1157 SNMP v1
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs
• RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs
• RFC 1155 SMI
• RFC 2674 SNMPv2, SNMPv2c
• RFC 1757 RMON
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP, RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB
for TCP, RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP
Table 132 SNMP Commands
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In
SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a
Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
260
SNMP Traps
The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs. The following tables outline the
SNMP traps by category.
An OID (Object ID) that begins with “1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15” is defined in private MIBs. Otherwise, it is a
standard MIB OID.
Table 133 SNMP System Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
coldstart coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned
on.
warmstart warmStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts.
fanspeed zyHwMonitorFanSpeedOutO
fRange
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes
above or below the normal operating
range.
zyHwMonitorFANSpeedOut
OfRangeRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.6 This trap is sent when the fan speed is
recovered from the out of range to normal
operating range.
temperature zyHwMonitorTemperatureOu
tOfRange
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.2 This trap is sent when the temperature goes
above or below the normal operating
range.
zyHwMonitorTemperatureOu
tOfRangeRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.7 This trap is sent when the temperature is
recovered from the out of range to normal
operating range.
reset zySysMgmtUncontrolledSyste
mReset
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.1 This trap is sent when the Switch
automatically resets.
zySysMgmtControlledSystem
Reset
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.2 This trap is sent when the Switch resets by
an administrator through a management
interface.
zySysMgmtBootImageIncons
istence
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.3 This trap is sent when the index number of
image which is loaded when the Switch
starts up is different from what is specified
via the CLI.
RebootEvent 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.5.1.1.2 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by
an administrator through a management
interface.
timesync zyDateTimeTrapTimeServerN
otReachable
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.82.3.1 This trap is sent when the Switch’s date and
time is not manually entered or the
specified time server is not reachable.
zyDateTimeTrapTimeServerN
otReachableRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.82.3.2 This trap is sent when the Switch’s real time
clock is up to date.
intrusionlock zyPortIntrusionLock 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.61.3.2 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs
on a port.
loopguard zyLoopGuardLoopDetect 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.45.2.1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down
a port.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
261
errdisable zyErrdisableDetect 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.24.4.1 This trap is sent when an error is detected
on a port, such as a loop occurs or the rate
limit for specific control packets is
exceeded.
zyErrdisableRecovery 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.24.4.2 This trap is sent when the Switch ceases the
action taken on a port, such as shutting
down the port or discarding packets on the
port, after the specified recovery interval.
poe
(For PoE models
only)
zyPoePowerPortOverload 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.1 This trap is sent when the port is turned off to
supply power due to overloading.
zyPoePowerPortShortCircuit 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.2 This trap is sent when the port is turned off to
supply power due to short circuit.
zyPoePowerPortOverSystem
Budget
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.3 This trap is sent when the port is turned off to
supply power because the requested
power exceeds the total PoE power
budget on the Switch.
zyPoePowerPortOverloadRe
covered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.5 This trap is sent when the port is turned on to
recover from an overloaded state.
zyPoePowerPortShortCircuitR
ecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.6 This trap is sent when the port is turned on to
recover from a short circuit.
zyPoePowerPortOverSystem
BudgetRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.7 This trap is sent when the port is turned on to
recover from an over system budget.
loginrecord zyAccessControlLoginRecor
d
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.1 This trap is sent when users log in.
zyAccessControlLogoutRec
ord
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.2 This trap is sent when users log out.
zyAccessControlLoginFail 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.3 This trap is sent when users fail in login.
Table 133 SNMP System Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Table 134 SNMP Interface Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
linkup linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link
is up.
linkdown linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link
is down.
lldp lldpRemTablesChange 1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1 The trap is sent when entries in the
remote database have any updates.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP),
defined as IEEE 802.1ab, enables LAN
devices that support LLDP to
exchange their configured settings.
This helps eliminate configuration
mismatch issues.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
262
transceiver-ddm zyTransceiverDdmiTemperature
OutOfRange
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.1 This trap is sent when the transceiver
temperature is above or below the
normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxPowerOutO
fRange
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.2 This trap is sent when the transmitted
optical power is above or below the
normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiRxPowerOutO
fRange
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.3 This trap is sent when the received
optical power is above or below the
normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiVoltageOutO
fRange
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.4 This trap is sent when the transceiver
supply voltage is above or below the
normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxBiasOutOfR
ange
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.5 This trap is sent when the transmitter
laser bias current is above or below
the normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTemperature
OutOfRangeRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.6 This trap is sent when the transceiver
temperature is recovered from the
out of normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxPowerOutO
fRangeRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.7 This trap is sent when the transmitted
optical power is recovered from the
out of normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiRxPowerOutO
fRangeRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.8 This trap is sent when the received
optical power is recovered from the
out of normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiVoltageOutO
fRangeRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.9 This trap is sent when the transceiver
supply voltage is recovered from the
out of normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxBiasOutOfR
angeRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.10 This trap is sent when the transmitter
laser bias current is recovered from
the out of normal operating range.
Storm-control zyPortStormControlTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.78.2.1 This trap is sent when storm control is
detected on a specific port. A packet
filter action has been applied on the
interface.
Table 134 SNMP Interface Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
263
Table 135 SNMP AAA Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
authentication authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when authentication
fails due to incorrect user name and/or
password.
zyAaaAuthenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.8.3.1 This trap is sent when authentication
fails due to incorrect user name and/or
password.
zyRadiusServerAuthenticationSer
verNotReachable
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.1 This trap is sent when there is no
response message from the RADIUS
authentication server.
zyRadiusServerAuthenticationSer
verNotReachableRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.3 This trap is sent when there is a response
message from the previously
unreachable RADIUS authentication
server.
authorization zyAaaAuthorizationFailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.8.3.2 This trap is sent when management
connection authorization failed.
accounting zyRadiusServerAccountingServer
NotReachable
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.2 This trap is sent when there is no
response message from the RADIUS
accounting server.
zyRadiusServerAccountingServer
NotReachableRecovered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.4 This trap is sent when there is a response
message from the previously
unreachable RADIUS accounting server.
Table 136 SNMP IP Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
ping pingProbeFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails.
pingTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.2 This trap is sent when a ping test (consisting of a series of
ping probes) fails.
pingTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed.
traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails.
traceRouteTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed.
Table 137 SNMP Switch Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
stp STPNewRoot 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes.
STPTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes.
mactable zyMacForwardingTableFull 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.4
8.2.1
This trap is sent when more than 99% of the MAC table is
used.
zyMacForwardingTableFullReco
vered
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.4
8.2.2
This trap is sent when the MAC address switching table
has become normal from full.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
264
32.7.2 SSH Overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure communication
protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted
communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Figure 194 SSH Communication Example
32.7.2.1 How SSH works
The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts.
rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON
"rising" threshold.
RmonFallingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON
"falling" threshold.
Table 137 SNMP Switch Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
265
Figure 195 How SSH Works
1Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The
client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result
back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public
key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption
method to use.
3Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between
the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name and password)
to the server to log in to the server.
32.7.2.2 SSH Implementation on the Switch
Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods (DES, 3DES
and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on
port 22. Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
266
32.7.2.3 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is
used to connect to the Switch over SSH.
32.7.3 Introduction to HTTPS
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that
encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that
enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the
transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if
data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys.
HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator. The
SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the Switch) must always authenticate itself to the SSL client (the
computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch), whereas the SSL client only should
authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so. Authenticating client certificates is optional
and if selected means the SSL-client must send the Switch a certificate. You must apply for a certificate
for the browser from a Certificate Authority (CA) that is a trusted CA on the Switch.
Please refer to the following figure.
1HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the Switch’s
WS (web server).
2HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the Switch’s WS (web
server).
Figure 196 HTTPS Implementation
Note: If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen, then the Switch blocks all HTTP
connection attempts.
32.7.3.1 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch, then in your browser enter “https://Switch
IP Address/” as the web site address where “Switch IP Address” is the IP address or domain name of the
Switch you wish to access.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
267
Internet Explorer Warning Messages
Internet Explorer 6
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust
the server certificate.
You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer. Select Yes to proceed to the web
configurator login screen; if you select No, then web configurator access is blocked.
Figure 197 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer 6)
Internet Explorer 7 or 8
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a screen with the message "There is a problem
with this website's security certificate." may display. If that is the case, click Continue to this website (not
recommended) to proceed to the web configurator login screen.
Figure 198 Security Certificate Warning (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
After you log in, you will see the red address bar with the message Certificate Error. Click on Certificate
Error next to the address bar and click View certificates.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
268
Figure 199 Certificate Error (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
Click Install Certificate... and follow the on-screen instructions to install the certificate in your browser.
Figure 200 Certificate (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a This Connection is Unstructed screen may
display. If that is the case, click I Understand the Risks and then the Add Exception... button.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
269
Figure 201 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox)
Confirm the HTTPS server URL matches. Click Confirm Security Exception to proceed to the web
configurator login screen.
Figure 202 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox)
EXAMPLE
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
270
32.7.4 Google Chrome Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a Your connection is not private screen may
display. If that is the case, click Advanced and then Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) to proceed to the web
configurator login screen.
Figure 203 Security Alert (Google Chrome 58.0.3029.110)
32.7.4.1 The Main Screen
After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password, the Switch main screen
appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar or next to the website address
denotes a secure connection.
Chapter 32 Access Control
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
271
Figure 204 Example: Lock Denoting a Secure Connection
EXAMPLE
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
272
CHAPTER 33
Diagnostic
33.1 Overview
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen. You can use this screen to help you identify problems.
33.2 Diagnostic
Click Management > Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to ping IP
addresses, run a traceroute, perform port tests or show the Switch’s location between devices.
Figure 205 Management > Diagnostic
Chapter 33 Diagnostic
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
273
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 138 Management > Diagnostic
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ping Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv4 address, and select vlan to specify the ID
number of the VLAN to which the Switch is to send ping requests. Otherwise, select - to send
ping requests to all VLANs on the Switch.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv6 address. You can also select vlan and specify
the ID number of the VLAN to which the Switch is to send ping requests. Otherwise, select - to
send ping requests to all VLANs on the Switch.
IP Address/Host
Name Type the IP address or host name of a device that you want to ping in order to test a
connection.
Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address.
Count Enter the number of ICMP Echo Request (ping) messages the Switch continuously sends.
Trace Route Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv4
address, and select vlan to specify the ID number of the VLAN on which the Switch traces
the path. Otherwise, select - to trace the path on any VLAN.
Note: The device to which you want to run a traceroute must belong to the VLAN
you specify here.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv6
address.
IP Address/Host
Name Enter the IP address or host name of a device to which you want to perform a traceroute.
Click Trace Route to have the Switch perform the traceroute function. This determines the
path a packet takes to the specified device.
TTL Enter the Time To Live (TTL) value for the ICMP Echo Request packets. This is to set the
maximum number of the hops (routers) a packet can travel through. Each router along the
path will decrement the TTL value by one and forward the packets. When the TTL value
becomes zero and the destination is not found, the router drops the packets and informs the
sender.
Wait Time Specify how many seconds the Switch waits for a response to a probe before running
another traceroute.
Queries Specify how many times the Switch performs the traceroute function.
Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Po rt Test to perform an internal loopback test.
Port This is the number of the physical Ethernet port on the Switch.
Cable Diagnostics Enter a port number and click Diagnose to perform a physical wire-pair test of the Ethernet
connections on the specified port(s). The following fields display when you diagnose a port.
Port This is the number of the physical Ethernet port on the Switch.
Channel An Ethernet cable usually has four pairs of wires. A 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port only use and
test two pairs, while a 1000BASE-T port requires all four pairs.
This displays the descriptive name of the wire-pair in the cable.
Pair status Ok: The physical connection between the wire-pair is okay.
Open: There is no physical connection (an open circuit detected) between the wire-pair.
Short: There is an short circuit detected between the wire-pair.
Unknown: The Switch failed to run cable diagnostics on the cable connected this port.
Unsupported: The port is a fiber port or it is not active.
Chapter 33 Diagnostic
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
274
Cable length This displays the total length of the Ethernet cable that is connected to the port when the
Pair status is Ok and the Switch chipset supports this feature.
This shows N/A if the Pair status is Open or Short. Check the Distance to fault.
This shows Unsupported if the Switch chipset does not support to show the cable length.
Distance to
fault This displays the distance between the port and the location where the cable is open or
shorted.
This shows N/A if the Pair status is Ok.
This shows Unsupported if the Switch chipset does not support to show the distance.
Locator LED Enter a time interval (in minutes) and click Blink to show the actual location of the Switch
between several devices in a rack.
The default time interval is 30 minutes.
Click Stop to have the Switch terminate the blinking locater LED.
Table 138 Management > Diagnostic (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
275
CHAPTER 34
System Log
34.1 Overview
A log message stores the information for viewing.
34.2 System Log
Click Management > System Log in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to check
current system logs.
Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages
automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log
message first.
Figure 206 Management > System Log
Chapter 34 System Log
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
276
The summary table shows the time the log message was recorded and the reason the log message was
generated. Click Refresh to update this screen. Click Clear to clear the whole log, regardless of what is
currently displayed on the screen. Click Download to save the log to your computer.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
277
CHAPTER 35
Syslog Setup
35.1 Syslog Overview
This chapter explains the syslog screens.
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog
servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and
send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility
identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The
following table describes the syslog severity levels.
35.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Syslog Setup screen (Section 35.2 on page 277) to configure the device’s system logging
settings and configure a list of external syslog servers.
35.2 Syslog Setup
The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server. Use this screen to configure the device’s
system logging settings and configure a list of external syslog servers.
Click Management > Syslog Setup in the navigation panel to display this screen.
Table 139 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
0 Emergency: The system is unusable.
1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
2 Critical: The system condition is critical.
3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.
4 Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
Chapter 35 Syslog Setup
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
278
Figure 207 Management > Syslog Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 140 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog (system logging) and then configure the syslog setting
Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate.
Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Syslog Server Setup
Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server. Clear the check box
if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it (you can
edit the entry later).
Server Address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the syslog server.
UDP Port The default syslog server port is 514. If your syslog server uses a different port, configure the
one it uses here.
Chapter 35 Syslog Setup
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
279
Log Level Select the severity level(s) of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server.
The lower the number, the more critical the logs are.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry. Click this number to edit the entry.
Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server. No displays if the
device is not to send logs to the syslog server.
IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server.
UDP Port This field displays the port of the syslog server.
Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies).
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 140 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
280
CHAPTER 36
Cluster Management
36.1 Cluster Management Overview
This chapter introduces cluster management.
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch, called the cluster manager.
The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to
communicate with one another.
In the following example, switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the
upper floors of the building are cluster members.
Figure 208 Clustering Application Example
36.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Cluster Management screen (Section 36.2 on page 281) to view the role of the Switch within
the cluster and to access a cluster member switch’s web configurator.
Table 141 Zyxel Clustering Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster members 24
Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with Zyxel cluster management
implementation.
Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member
switches.
Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch.
Chapter 36 Cluster Management
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
281
• Use the Clustering Management Configuration screen (Section 36.1 on page 280) to configure
clustering management.
36.2 Cluster Management Status
Use this screen to view the role of the Switch within the cluster and to access a cluster member switch’s
web configurator.
Click Management > Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Note: A cluster can only have one manager.
Figure 209 Management > Cluster Management: Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 142 Management > Cluster Management: Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster.
Manager
Member (you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via
the cluster manager)
None (neither a manager nor a member of a cluster)
Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch’s hardware MAC address.
The Number of
Member
This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster. The following fields describe
the cluster member switches.
Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch. Each number in the
Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch’s web configurator (see Figure
211 on page 284).
MacAddr This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Model This field displays the model name.
Status This field displays:
Online (the cluster member switch is accessible)
Error (for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the
manager and so left the member list, etc.)
Offline (the switch is disconnected - Offline shows approximately 1.5 minutes after the link
between cluster member and manager goes down)
Chapter 36 Cluster Management
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
282
36.3 Clustering Management Configuration
Use this screen to configure clustering management. Click Management > Cluster Management >
Configuration to display the next screen.
Figure 210 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 143 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clustering Manager
Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch. A cluster can only
have one manager. Other (directly connected) switches that are set to be cluster
managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list. If a switch that was previously a
cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager, then its Status is displayed as Error
in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the member
summary list below.
Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager. You may use up to 32 printable characters
(spaces are allowed).
VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802.1Q VLAN. All switches must
be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster. Switches
that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list. This field
is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port-based VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Chapter 36 Cluster Management
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
283
36.4 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
36.4.1 Cluster Member Switch Management
Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index
hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch's web configurator home page.
This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you'd see if you accessed it
directly are different.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clustering
Candidate
The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members.
List A list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery is shown here. The switches must be
directly connected. Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not
be visible in the Clustering Candidate list. Switches that are not in the same management
VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Password Each cluster member’s password is its web configurator password. Select a member in the
Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password. If that switch
administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards, then it cannot be
managed from the Cluster Manager. Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster
Management Status screen.
If multiple devices have the same password then hold [SHIFT] and click those switches to
select them. Then enter their common web configurator password.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto-discovery again to list potential cluster members.
The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured.
Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch.
MacAddr This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Model This is the cluster member switch’s model name.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Remove Click the Remove button to remove the selected cluster member switch(es) from the
cluster.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 143 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 36 Cluster Management
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
284
Figure 211 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
36.4.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as
shown in the following example.
example
Chapter 36 Cluster Management
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
285
Figure 212 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 Switch FTP version 1.0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00:58:46 1970
User (192.168.0.1:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in
ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12:00 ras
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12:00 config
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File sent OK
ftp: 297 bytes received in 0.00Seconds 297000.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp> bin
200 Type I OK
ftp> put 460ABPI0.bin fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File received OK
ftp: 262144 bytes sent in 0.63Seconds 415.44Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
Table 144 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
User Enter “admin”.
Password The web configurator password default is 1234.
ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch’s firmware and
configuration file.
460ABPI0.bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member
switch.
fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s firmware name as seen in the cluster
manager switch.
config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s configuration file name as seen in the cluster
manager switch.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
286
CHAPTER 37
MAC Table
37.1 MAC Table Overview
This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen.
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are
forwarded or filtered across the Switch’s ports. It shows what device MAC address, belonging to what
VLAN group (if any) is forwarded to which port(s) and whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by
the Switch) or static (manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
37.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the MAC Table screen (Section 37.2 on page 287) to check whether the MAC address is dynamic or
static.
37.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came.
2The Switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address
already learned in the MAC table.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to that port.
• If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to all
ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the same as
the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
Chapter 37 MAC Table
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
287
Figure 213 MAC Table Flowchart
37.2 Viewing the MAC Table
Use this screen to check whether the MAC address is dynamic or static.
Click Management > MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Figure 214 Management > MAC Table
Chapter 37 MAC Table
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
288
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 145 Management > MAC Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition Select one of the buttons and click Search to only display the data which matches the criteria
you specified.
Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch.
Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch.
Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry.
Select VID and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to the
specified VLAN.
Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses which
are forwarded on the specified port.
Select Trunk and type the ID of a trunk group to display all MAC addresses learned from the
port(s) in the trunk group.
Sort by Define how the Switch displays and arranges the data in the summary table below.
Select MAC to display and arrange the data according to MAC address.
Select VID to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.
Select PORT to display and arrange the data according to port number.
Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically
learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into static entries. They also display in
the Static MAC Forwarding screen.
Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned
MAC address entries in the summary table below into MAC filtering entries. These entries will then
display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is Discard source .
Search Click this to search data in the MAC table according to your input criteria.
Transfer Click this to perform the MAC address transferring you selected in the Transfer Type field.
Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values.
Index This is the incoming frame index number.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.
Port This is the port where the above MAC address is forwarded.
Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (manually
entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
289
CHAPTER 38
ARP Table
38.1 Overview
This chapter introduces ARP Table.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to
a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area
network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP
Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
38.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the ARP Table screen (Section 38.2 on page 289) to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s).
38.1.2 What You Need to Know
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch, the
Switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The
Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of
the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field
(FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of
the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the
target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the
requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the
MAC address that replied.
38.2 Viewing the ARP Table
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s) and remove specific dynamic ARP entries.
Click Management > ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Chapter 38 ARP Table
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
290
Figure 215 Management > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 146 Management > ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition Specify how you want the Switch to remove ARP entries when you click Flush.
Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table.
Select IP Address and enter an IP address to remove the dynamic entries learned with the
specified IP address.
Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries learned on the specified port.
Flush Click Flush to remove the ARP entries according to the condition you specified.
Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the ARP table entry number.
IP Address This is the IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC address
below.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs.
Port This field displays the port to which the device connects. CPU means this IP address is the Switch’s
management IP address.
Age(s) This field displays how long (in seconds) an entry can still remain in the ARP table before it ages out
and needs to be relearned. This shows 0 for a static entry.
Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (manually
configured in the Basic Setting > IP Setup or IP Application > ARP Setup > Static ARP screen).
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
291
CHAPTER 39
Path MTU Table
39.1 Path MTU Overview
This chapter introduces the IPv6 Path MTU table.
The largest size (in bytes) of a packet that can be transferred over a data link is called the maximum
transmission unit (MTU). The Switch uses Path MTU Discovery to discover Path MTU (PMTU), that is, the
minimum link MTU of all the links in a path to the destination. If the Switch receives an ICMPv6 Packet Too
Big error message after sending a packet, it fragments the next packet according to the suggested MTU
in the error message.
39.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 path MTU information on the Switch. Click Management > Path MTU Table in
the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 216 Management > Path MTU Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 147 Management > Path MTU Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Path MTU
aging time
This field displays how long an entry remains in the Path MTU table before it ages out and needs to
be relearned.
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Destination
Address
This field displays the destination IPv6 address of each path/entry.
MTU This field displays the maximum transmission unit of the links in the path.
Expire This field displays how long (in minutes) an entry can still remain in the Path MTU table before it
ages out and needs to be relearned.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
292
CHAPTER 40
Configure Clone
40.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports.
40.2 Configure Clone
Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or
ports. Click Management > Configure Clone to open the following screen.
Figure 217 Management > Configure Clone
Chapter 40 Configure Clone
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
293
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 148 Management > Configure Clone
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source/
Destination
Port
Enter the source port under the Source label. This port’s attributes are copied.
Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label. These are the ports which are going
to have the same attributes as the source port. You can enter individual ports separated by a
comma or a range of ports by using a dash.
Example:
2, 4, 6 indicates that ports 2, 4 and 6 are the destination ports.
2-6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports.
Basic Setting Select which port settings (you configured in the Basic Setting menus) should be copied to the
destination port(s).
Advanced
Application
Select which port settings (you configured in the Advanced Application menus) should be copied
to the destination ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
294
CHAPTER 41
IPv6 Neighbor Table
41.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview
This chapter introduces the IPv6 neighbor table.
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor table. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the
Switch sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch receives a neighbor advertisement
in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the neighbor table. You can also manually
create a static IPv6 neighbor entry using the Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor
Setup screen.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults other table to determine the next hop. Once
the next hop IPv6 address is known, the Switch looks into the neighbor table to get the link-layer address
and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Switch cannot find an entry in the
neighbor table or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This
helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
41.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 neighbor information on the Switch. Click Management > IPv6 Neighbor
Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 218 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 149 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Sort by Select this to display and arrange the data according to IPv6 address (Address), MAC address
(MAC) or IPv6 interface (Interface). The information is then displayed in the summary table below.
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the Switch or a neighboring device.
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the IPv6 interface on which the IPv6 address is configured or
the MAC address of the neighboring device.
Chapter 41 IPv6 Neighbor Table
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
295
Status This field displays whether the neighbor IPv6 interface is reachable. In IPv6, “reachable” means an
IPv6 packet can be correctly forwarded to a neighbor node (host or router) and the neighbor
can successfully receive and handle the packet. The available options in this field are:
• reachable (R): The interface of the neighboring device is reachable. (The Switch has received
a response to the initial request.)
• stale (S): The last reachable time has expired and the Switch is waiting for a response to
another initial request. The field displays this also when the Switch receives an unrequested
response from the neighbor’s interface.
• delay (D): The neighboring interface is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has been
sent to the neighbor recently. The Switch delays sending request packets for a short to give
upper-layer protocols a chance to determine reachability.
• probe (P): The Switch is sending request packets and waiting for the neighbor’s response.
• invalid (IV): The neighbor address is with an invalid IPv6 address.
• unknown (?): The status of the neighboring interface can not be determined for some reason.
• incomplete (I): Address resolution is in progress and the link-layer address of the neighbor has
not yet been determined. The interface of the neighboring device did not give a complete
response.
Type This field displays the type of an address mapping to a neighbor interface. The available options in
this field are:
• other (O): none of the following type.
• local (L): A Switch interface is using the address.
• dynamic (D): The IP address to MAC address can be successfully resolved using IPv6 Neighbor
Discovery protocol. Is it similar as IPv4 ARP (Address Resolution protocol).
• static (S): The interface address is statically configured.
Interface This field displays the ID number of the IPv6 interface on which the IPv6 address is created or
through which the neighboring device can be reached.
Table 149 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
296
CHAPTER 42
Port Status
42.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the port status screens.
42.2 Port Status
This screen displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details. To view
the port statistics, click Status in all web configurator screens and then the Port Status link in the Quick
Links section of the Status screen to display the Port Status screen as shown next. You can also click
Management > Port Status to see the following screen.
Figure 219 Port Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 150 Port Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This identifies the Ethernet port. Click a port number to display the Port Details screen (refer to
Figure 220 on page 298).
Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen.
Link This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10 Mbps, 100M for 100 Mbps, or 1G for 1 Gbps) and
the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half). It also shows the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the
combo ports. This field displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
State If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port. SeeSection
13.1 on page 131 for more information.
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays STOP.
When LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) and STP are in blocking state, it displays
Blocking.
PD This field displays whether or not a powered device (PD) is allowed to receive power from the
Switch on this port.
Chapter 42 Port Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
297
42.2.1 Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Port Status screen to display individual port statistics. Use this
screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch.
LACP This fields displays whether LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) has been enabled on the
port.
TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port.
RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port.
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Rx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has been up.
Clear Counter Select Port, enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical
information for that port, or select Any to clear statistics for all ports.
Table 150 Port Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 42 Port Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
298
Figure 220 Port Status > Port Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 151 Port Status: Port Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Info
Port NO. This field displays the port number you are viewing.
Name This field displays the name of the port.
Link This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10 Mbps, 100M for 100 Mbps, or 1G for 1 Gbps) and the
duplex (F for full duplex or H for half duplex). It also shows the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the
combo ports. This field displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
State If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port. SeeSection
13.1 on page 131 for more information.
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays STOP.
When LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) and STP are in blocking state, it displays Blocking.
Chapter 42 Port Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
299
LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not.
TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port
RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx kB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Tx
Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual transmitted frames on this port as a percentage of the
Link speed.
Rx kB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Rx
Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual received frames on this port as a percentage of the Link
speed.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up.
Tx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted.
Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets transmitted.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets transmitted.
Rx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets received.
Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets received.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets received.
TX Collision
The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting.
Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one
collision.
Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more
than one collision.
Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions. Excessive
collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset.
Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected, that is, after 512 bits of the packets have
already been transmitted.
Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error.
RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s).
Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range.
Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short (shorter than 64 octets),
including the ones with CRC errors.
Distribution
64 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in
length.
65-127 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65
and 127 octets in length.
Table 151 Port Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 42 Port Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
300
42.2.2 DDMI
The optical SFP transceiver’s support for the Digital Diagnostics Monitoring Interface (DDMI) function lets
you monitor the transceiver’s parameters to perform component monitoring, fault isolation and failure
prediction tasks. This allows proactive, preventative network maintenance to help ensure service
continuity.
Use this screen to view the DDMI status of the Switch’s SFP transceivers. Click Management > Port Status >
DDMI to see the following screen. Alternatively, click Status from any Web Configurator screen and then
the Port Status link in the Quick Links section of the Status screen to display the Port Status screen and
then click the DDMI link tab.
Figure 221 Management > Port Status > DDMI
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
42.2.3 DDMI Details
Use this screen to view the real-time SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) transceiver information and
operating parameters on the SFP port. The parameters include, for example, transmitting and receiving
power, and module temperature.
128-255 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128
and 255 octets in length.
256-511 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256
and 511 octets in length.
512-1023 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512
and 1023 octets in length.
1024-1518 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024
and 1518 octets in length.
Giant This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1519
octets and the maximum frame size.
The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch model.
Table 151 Port Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 152 Management > Port Status > DDMI
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This identifies the SFP port.
Vendor This displays the vendor name of the optical transceiver.
Part Number This displays the part number of the optical transceiver.
Serial Number This displays the serial number of the optical transceiver.
Revision This displays the revision number of the optical transceiver.
Date Code This displays the date when the optical transceiver was manufactured.
Transceiver This displays whether the connection to the optical network is up or down.
Chapter 42 Port Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
301
Click a number in the Port column in the DDMI screen to view current transceivers’ status.
Figure 222 Management > Port Status > DDMI > DDMI Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 153 Management > Port Status > DDMI > DDMI Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Transceiver Information
Port No This identifies the SFP port.
Connector Type This displays the connector type of the optical transceiver.
Vendor This displays the vendor name of the optical transceiver.
Part Number This displays the part number of the optical transceiver.
Serial Number This displays the serial number of the optical transceiver.
Revision This displays the revision number of the optical transceiver.
Date Code This displays the date when the optical transceiver was manufactured.
Transceiver This displays details about the type of transceiver installed in the SFP slot.
Calibration This field is available only when an SFP transceiver is inserted into the SFP slot.
Internal displays if the measurement values are calibrated by the transceiver. External displays
if the measurement values are raw data which the Switch calibrates.
DDMI Information
Type This displays the DDMI parameter.
Temperature
(C) This displays the temperature inside the SFP transceiver in degrees Celsius.
Voltage (V) This displays the level of voltage being supplied to the SFP transceiver.
TX Bias (mA) This displays the milliamps (mA) being supplied to the SFP transceiver’s Laser Diode Transmitter.
TX Power
(dbm) This displays the amount of power the SFP transceiver is transmitting.
RX Power
(dbm) This displays the amount of power the SFP transceiver is receiving from the fiber optic cable.
Chapter 42 Port Status
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
302
42.2.4 Port Utilization
This screen displays the percentage of actual transmitted or received frames on a port as a percentage
of the Link speed. To view port utilization, click Management > Port Status > Port Utilization to see the
following screen. Alternatively, click Status from any Web Configurator screen and then the Port Status
link in the Quick Links section of the Status screen to display the Port Status screen and then click the
Utilization link tab.
Figure 223 Management > Port Status > Utilization
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Current This displays the current status for each monitored DDMI parameter.
High Alarm
Threshold
This displays the high value alarm threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. An alarm
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
High Warn
Threshold
This displays the high value warning threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. A warning
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
Low Warn
Threshold
This displays the low value warning threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. A warning
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
Low Alarm
Threshold
This displays the low value alarm threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. An alarm
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
Table 153 Management > Port Status > DDMI > DDMI Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 154 Management > Port Status > Utilization
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This identifies the Ethernet port.
Link This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10 Mbps, 100M for 100 Mbps, or 1G for 1 Gbps) and the
duplex (F for full duplex). It also shows the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the combo ports. This
field displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
Tx kB/s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second.
Tx Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual transmitted frames on this port as a percentage of the
Link speed.
Rx KB/s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second.
Rx Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual received frames on this port as a percentage of the Link
speed.
303
PART III
Troubleshooting and
Appendices
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
304
CHAPTER 43
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are
divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•Switch Access and Login
•Switch Configuration
43.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Switch does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure the Switch is turned on.
2Make sure you are using the power adapter or cord included with the Switch.
3Make sure the power adapter or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
4Turn the Switch off and on.
5Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or cord to the Switch.
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.3 on page 36.
2Check the hardware connections. See Section 3.1 on page 31.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4Turn the Switch off and on.
5Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or cord to the Switch.
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
Chapter 43 Troubleshooting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
305
43.2 Switch Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Switch.
1The default in-band IP address in standalone mode is http://DHCP-assigned IP (when connecting to a
DHCP server) or 192.168.1.1.
2Use the ZON utility to find the IP address.
3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.8 on page 62.
I forgot the username and/or password.
1The default username is admin and the default password is 1234.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.8 on page 62.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default in-band IP address in standalone mode is http://DHCP-assigned IP (when connecting
to a DHCP server) or 192.168.1.1.
If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Switch.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section 3.3
on page 36.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch. (If you know that there are routers
between your computer and the Switch, skip this step.)
5Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Switch with the default IP address. See
Section 4.8 on page 62.
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the Switch using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Switch, check the
remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP.
Chapter 43 Troubleshooting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
306
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Switch.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is admin,
and the default password is 1234. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions. Close other Telnet
session(s) or try connecting again later.
Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet. If you have configured a secured client IP
address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for details.
3Disconnect and re-connect the cord to the Switch.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.8 on page 62.
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet, HTTP and SSH.
To avoid unauthorized access, configure the secured client setting in the Management > Access
Control > Remote Management screen for telnet, HTTP and SSH (see Section 32.6 on page 257).
Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch.
43.3 Switch Configuration
I lost my configuration settings after I restart the Switch.
Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch’s
nonvolatile memory each time you make changes. Click Save at
the top right corner of the web configurator to save the
configuration permanently. See also Section 31.2.2 on page 240 for more information about how to save
your configuration.
Chapter 43 Troubleshooting
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
307
I accidentally unplugged the Switch. I’m not sure which configuration file will be loaded.
If you plug the power cable back to the Switch, it’ll reboot and load the configuration file that was used
the last time. For example, if Config 1 was used on the Switch before you accidentally unplugged the
Switch, Config 1 will be loaded when rebooting.
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
308
APPENDIX A
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If
you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the
device.
See https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also
https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/
India
•Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/
Kazakhstan
•Zyxel Kazakhstan
• https://www.zyxel.kz
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
309
Korea
• Zyxel Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• Zyxel Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand
• Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/
Vietnam
• Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Belarus
•Zyxel BY
• https://www.zyxel.by
Belgium
• Zyxel Communications B.V.
• https://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
310
• https://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/
Bulgaria
•Zyxel България
• https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o
• https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/
Denmark
• Zyxel Communications A/S
• https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/
Estonia
• Zyxel Estonia
• https://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/
France
•Zyxel France
• https://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
•Zyxel Deutschland GmbH
• https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/
Hungary
• Zyxel Hungary & SEE
• https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/
Italy
• Zyxel Communications Italy
• https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/
Latvia
•Zyxel Latvia
• https://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
311
Lithuania
•Zyxel Lithuania
• https://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/
Netherlands
• Zyxel Benelux
• https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/
Norway
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/
Poland
• Zyxel Communications Poland
• https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/
Romania
• Zyxel Romania
• https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• Zyxel Russia
• https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/
Slovakia
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/
Spain
• Zyxel Communications ES Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/
Sweden
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/
Switzerland
•Studerus AG
• https://www.zyxel.ch/de
• https://www.zyxel.ch/fr
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
312
Turkey
• Zyxel Turkey A.S.
• https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/
UK
• Zyxel Communications UK Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/
Ukraine
•Zyxel Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
South America
Argentina
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Brazil
• Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda.
• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Colombia
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Ecuador
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
South America
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Middle East
Israel
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• http://il.zyxel.com/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
313
Middle East
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/me/en/
North America
USA
• Zyxel Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
Oceania
Australia
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/za/en/
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
314
APPENDIX B
Common Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers.
For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet
Assigned Number Authority) web site.
•Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one,
if you like.
•Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the
same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not
the port number.
•Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port
numbers.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
•Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which
this service is used.
Table 155 Commonly Used Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling
protocol uses this service.
AIM/New-ICQ TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It is also used
as a listening port by ICQ.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP
UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that matches
web names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP
numbers.
ESP (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command
that can be used to find out if a user is logged
on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast
transfer of files, including large files that may not
be possible by e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server
protocol for the world wide web.
Appendix B Common Services
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
315
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-
commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1Internet Control Message Protocol is often used
for diagnostic or routing purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when
sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for
key distribution and management.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this
protocol.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/server
distributed file service that provides transparent
file sharing for network environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery
mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends
out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a
remote host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through
a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure
transfer of data over public networks. This is the
control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables
secure transfer of data over public networks. This
is the data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time
sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia
on the Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-
exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP
enables you to move messages from one e-mail
server to another.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
Table 155 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix B Common Services
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
316
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to
access data on many different types of
database systems, including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and network
servers.
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX
server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX
environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks.
Its primary function is to allow users to log into
remote host systems.
TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file
transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP
(User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution.
Table 155 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
317
APPENDIX C
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in
IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an
example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be
written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6
prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the
network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a “private IP
address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-
local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as
follows.
Table 156 Link-local Unicast Address Format
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in IPv4. A
global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
Appendix C IPv6
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
318
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have
its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to “127.0.0.1”
in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is
not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a
multicast group.
Table 157 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
Table 158 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Appendix C IPv6
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
319
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into
eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character
(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example,
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet
port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should
have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-byte)
Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes
of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the
following example.
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP server.
Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated
on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC
address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address (beginning
with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Switch is set to automatically obtain
an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 2another address which combines
its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable global IP
address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that
allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration
information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP.
Table 159
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34 : 56
Table 160
EUI-64 02: 13 : 49 : FF : FE : 12 : 34 : 56
2. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
Appendix C IPv6
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
320
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification
when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time,
vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not
change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the
server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly
one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP
server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity
association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses.
An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1
and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any
addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which
the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server
does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the
client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion.
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between
the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-known multicast
address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to
a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option
to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the
system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the
DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay
agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-
Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should
not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or
a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Switch uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/
48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by multicast,
the Switch passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to
generate their IPv6 addresses.
T1
T2
Renew Rebind
Rebind
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
to S2
to S2
Appendix C IPv6
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
321
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has
a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4.
ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet
processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message.
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from
a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list.
The Switch maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response
messages. In IPv6, the Switch configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends a neighbor
solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the
Switch also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch receives a neighbor
advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the neighbor cache. When the
Switch uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement
message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor cache, prefix list and destination cache. The
Switch creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the next
hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Switch uses the prefix list to determine
whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing through a router.
If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the Switch determines the
next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP address is known, the Switch
looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is
reachable. If the Switch cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not
reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and
advertisement messages.
Appendix C IPv6
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
322
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6
install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig
command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your
automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the
interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have
to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses
or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
2After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service.
3Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
4Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
Appendix C IPv6
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
323
5Click Start and then OK.
6Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
1Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
2Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3Click OK to save the change.
Appendix C IPv6
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
324
4Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address
(2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
325
APPENDIX D
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2019 by Zyxel Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any
language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel Communications Corporation.
Published by Zyxel Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any
license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein
without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
United States of America
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) EMC Statement
• This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Canada The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area.
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES statement
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
European Union
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
CE EMC statement
WARNING: This equipment is compliant with Class A of EN55032. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
Appendix D Legal Information
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
326
List of National Codes
Safety Warnings
• To avoid possible eye injury, do NOT look into an operating fiber-optic module’s connector.
• Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do not store things on the device.
• Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an
enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa.
• Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. Only qualified
service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to
a power outlet.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor
or cord.
• Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example,
110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the
device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Caution: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at
the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic device. For detailed information about recycling of this product,
please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• Use ONLY power wires of the appropriate wire gauge for your device. Connect it to a power supply of the correct voltage.
• Fuse Warning! Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating.
• The POE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors.
• The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
- For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;
- For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible.
• This device must be grounded by qualified service personnel. Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the device in the absence of a
suitably installed ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that
suitable grounding is available.
• When connecting or disconnecting power to hot-pluggable power supplies, if offered with your system, observe the following guidelines:
- Install the power supply before connecting the power cable to the power supply.
- Unplug the power cable before removing the power supply.
- If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cables from the power supply.
• CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and GPON products).
• PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11. (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and
GPON products)
• APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASS 1 (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and GPON products).
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CR Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Sweden SE
Ireland IE Switzerland CH
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix D Legal Information
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
327
• PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11. (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and
GPON products)
Environment Statement
European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information
The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of
your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt
werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der
Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt
und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des ordures
ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte séparée
de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici.
Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta
separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här produkten når
slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och mänsklig hälsa genom att
göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
台灣
警告使用者：
• 這是甲類的資訊產品，在居住的環境中使用時，可能會造成射頻干擾，在這種情況下，使用者會被要求採取某些適當的對策。」
安全警告 - 為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸
- 任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
- 灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC，歐洲是 230V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買一個新的電源變壓器。
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。
Appendix D Legal Information
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
328
• 請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 設備必須接地，接地導線不允許被破壞或沒有適當安裝接地導線，如果不確定接地方式是否符合要求可聯繫相應的電氣檢驗機構檢驗。
• 如果您提供的系統中有提供熱插拔電源，連接或斷開電源請遵循以下指導原則
- 先連接電源線至設備連，再連接電源。
- 先斷開電源再拔除連接至設備的電源線。
- 如果系統有多個電源，需拔除所有連接至電源的電源線再關閉設備電源。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分，以下警語將適用 :
- 對永久連接之設備， 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；
- 對插接式之設備， 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
About the Symbols
Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage.
The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the
contents.
Explanation of the Symbols
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
Zyxel Limited Warranty
Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the
Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local
distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product
have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or
components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to
proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,
and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by
an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties,
express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held
liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the
device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive email notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (Zyxel Network Operating System) and ZON (Zyxel One Network) are registered trademarks of Zyxel Communications, Inc. Other
trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
SYMBOL EXPLANATION
Alternating current (AC):
AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction.
Direct current (DC):
DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers.
Earth; ground:
A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor.
Class II equipment:
The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation
or reinforced insulation.
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
329
Index
Numerics
802.1P priority 89
A
AAA 162
accounting 162
authentication 162
authorization 162
external server 162
RADIUS 162
TACACS+ 162
AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting)
162
access control
limitations 248
login account 254
remote management 257
service port 256
SNMP 258
accounting
setup 165
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 234, 289, 292, 293
administrator password 43, 255
aging time 85
applications
backbone 20
bridging 21
fiber uplink 21
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 22
PoE 19
switched workgroup 22
ARP
how it works 234
learning mode 234
overview 234
setup 236
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) 289
ARP-Reply 234
ARP-Request 235
authentication
setup 165
authentication, authorization and accounting 162
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting, see
AAA 162
authorization
privilege levels 166
setup 165
auto PD recovery 216
enable 216
restart 216
use LLDP or ping 216
auto-crossover 32
B
back up, configuration file 243
bandwidth control 137
egress rate 138
ingress rate 138
setup 137
basic settings 81
basic setup tutorial 68
binding table
building 171
BPDUs 132
Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) 132
broadcast storm control 139
C
certifications
viewing 328
CFI 110
CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) 110
changing the password 61
Class of Service 218
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
330
cloning a port See port cloning
cluster management 280
and switch passwords 283
cluster manager 280, 282
cluster member 280, 283
cluster member firmware upgrade 284
network example 280
setup 282
specification 280
status 281
switch models 280
VID 282
web configurator 283
cluster manager 280
cluster member 280
configuration
change running config 240
saving 62
configuration file
backup 243
restore 243
saving 240
console port
settings 36
contact information 308
copying port settings, See port cloning
copyright 325
CoS 218
CPU management port 121
CPU protection 185
current date 84
current time 83
customer support 308
D
daylight saving time 84
default Ethernet settings 32
DHCP
configuration options 222
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 222
modes 222
Relay Agent Information format 224
setup 223
DHCP relay option 82 180
DHCP snooping 68, 179
configuring 181
DHCP relay option 82 180
trusted ports 179
untrusted ports 179
DHCP snooping database 180
DHCPv4
global relay 226
global relay example 228
Option 82 224
option 82 profiles 225
Relay Agent Information 224
DHCPv4 relay 223
DHCPv6 relay 232
interface-ID 232
remote-ID 232
diagnostics 272
Ethernet port test 273
ping 273
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) 218
Differentiated Services 218
DiffServ 218
activate 219
DS field 218
DSCP 218
network example 219
PHB 218
service level 218
DiffServ Code Points 218
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring Interface 300
disclaimer 325
DNS 106
DNS (Domain Name System) 106
Domain Name System 106
DS (Differentiated Services) 218
DSCP 218
what it does 218
dual firmware images 241
dynamic link aggregation 143
E
egress port 122
egress rate, and bandwidth control 138
errdisable status 188
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
331
error disable 185
control packets 187
CPU protection 188
detect 189
recovery 190
status 186
error-disable recovery 185
Ethernet broadcast address 234, 289
Ethernet MAC 82
Ethernet port test 273
external authentication server 163
F
FCC interference statement 325
file transfer using FTP
command example 245
filename convention, configuration
configuration
file names 245
filtering 129
rules 129
filtering database, MAC table 286
firmware 82
upgrade 241, 284
flow control
back pressure 89
IEEE802.3x 89
frames
tagged 116
untagged 116
front panel 31
FTP 245
file transfer procedure 246
restrictions over WAN 247
G
general setup 83
getting help 63
Gigabit ports 31
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) 84
gratuitous ARP 235
green Ethernet 192
and uplink port 192
auto power down 192
EEE 192
short reach 192
H
hardware installation 25
hardware monitor 82
hardware overview 31
HTTPS 266
certificates 266
implementation 266
public keys, private keys 266
HTTPS example 266
I
IEEE 802.3af 19
IEEE 802.3at 19
IEEE 802.3az 192
IEEE 802.3bt 19
IGMP filtering
profile 160
IGMP leave timeout
fast 158
normal 158
IGMP snooping 155
IGMP throttling 158
ingress port 122
ingress rate, and bandwidth control 138
initial setup 64
installation
desktop 25
precautions 29
rack-mounting 28
transceivers 33
installation scenarios 25
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
IP address 87
IP setup 86
IP subnet mask 87
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
332
IPv6 317
addressing 317
EUI-64 319
global address 317
interface ID 319
link-local address 317
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 317
neighbor table 294
ping 317
prefix 317
prefix length 317
stateless autoconfiguration 319
unspecified address 318
IPv6 interface 95
DHCPv6 client 105
enable 100
global address 102
global unicast address 97
link-local address 101
link-local IP 97
neighbor discovery 102
neighbor table 103
stateless autoconfiguration 100
status 96
IPv6 neighbor table 294
L
LACP 143
system priority 147
timeout 148
LEDs 36
link aggregation 143
dynamic 143
ID information 144
setup 145
traffic distribution algorithm 145
traffic distribution type 146
trunk group 143
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) 143
Link Layer Discovery Protocol 194
LLDP 194
Basic TLV 209
global settings 208
local port status 198
organization-specific TLV 210
status of remote device 202
TLV 194
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) 194
LLDP-MED 195
classes of endpoint devices 195
example 195
lockout 62
log message 275
login 40
password 61
login account
Administrator 254
non-administrator 254
login accounts 254
configuring via web configurator 254
multiple 254
number of 254
login password 255
loop guard 182
examples 183
port shut down 183
setup 184
vs. STP 182
M
MAC 82
MAC (Media Access Control) 82
MAC address 82, 289
MAC address learning 85
MAC table 286
display criteria 288
how it works 286
sorting criteria 288
transfer type 288
viewing 287
MAC-based VLAN 118
maintenance 238
configuration backup 243
current configuration 239
firmware 241
main screen 239
restoring configuration 243
Management Information Base (MIB) 259
management IP address 86
management port 122
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
333
managing the device
good habits 23
using FTP. See FTP. 23
using Telnet. See command interface. 23
using the command interface. See command
interface. 23
maximum transmission unit 291
Mbuf 244
Mbuf (Memory Buffer) 244
MDIX (Media Dependent Interface Crossover) 32
Media Access Control 82
Memory Buffer 244
MIB
and SNMP 259
supported MIBs 259
MIB (Management Information Base) 259
mirroring ports 141
monitor port 141
mounting brackets 29
MSTP 131
MTU 291
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 84
multicast
IGMP throttling 158
IP addresses 155
setup 156
multicast group 160
multicast MAC address 125
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, See MSTP 131
Multi-Tenant Unit 84
N
network applications 19
network management system (NMS) 258
NTP (RFC-1305) 83
O
one-time schedule 150
Option 82 224
P
password 61
administrator 43, 255
Path MTU 291
Path MTU Discovery 291
Per-Hop Behavior 218
PHB 218
ping, test connection 273
PoE
PD priority 94
power management mode 93
power-up mode 93
PoE standard 19
port cloning 292, 293
advanced settings 292, 293
basic settings 292, 293
port details 297
port mirroring 141
port redundancy 143
port setup 88
port status 296
port details 297
port utilization 302
port utilization 302
port VLAN ID, see PVID 115
port VLAN trunking 110
port-based VLAN 121
all connected 122
port isolation 122
settings wizard 122
ports
diagnostics 273, 274
mirroring 141
speed/duplex 89
standby 143
power connections 35
power connector 35
priority level 86
priority queue assignment 86
product registration 328
PVID 110
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
334
Q
QoS 218
Quality of Service 218
queue weight 153
queuing 152
SPQ 152
WRR 152
queuing method 152, 154
R
rack-mounting 28
RADIUS 163
advantages 163
and tunnel protocol attribute 169
setup 163
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, See RSTP. 131
reboot
load configuration 240
reboot system 240
recurring schedule 150
registration
product 328
remote management 257
service 258
trusted computers 258
resetting 62, 240
to factory default settings 240
restoring configuration 62, 243
RFC 3164 277
Round Robin Scheduling 152
RSTP 131
configuration 134
rubber feet 25
running configuration 240
erase 240
reset 240
S
save configuration 62, 240
schedule
one-time 150
recurring 150
type 151
Secure Shell See SSH
service access control 256
service port 257
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) 32
SNMP 258
agent 259
and MIB 259
authentication 253, 254
communities 43, 250
management model 258
manager 259
MIB 259
network components 258
object variables 259
protocol operations 259
security 253, 254
setup 249
traps 250
users 252
version 3 and security 259
versions supported 258
SNMP traps 260
supported 260, 263
Spanning Tree Protocol, See STP. 131
SPQ (Strict Priority Queuing) 152
SSH
encryption methods 265
how it works 264
implementation 265
SSH (Secure Shell) 264
SSL (Secure Socket Layer) 266
standby ports 143
static MAC address 123
static MAC forwarding 123
static multicast address 125
static multicast forwarding 125
static VLAN 113
control 114
tagging 114
status 57, 75
port 296
STP 133
VLAN 111
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
335
STP 131
bridge ID 133
bridge priority 135
designated bridge 132
edge port 136
forwarding delay 135
Hello BPDU 132
Hello Time 133, 135
how it works 132
Max Age 133, 135
path cost 132, 136
port priority 136
port role 134
port state 132, 134
root port 132
status 133
terminology 131
vs. loop guard 182
switch lockout 62
switch reset 62
switch setup 85
syslog 277
protocol 277
settings 277
setup 277
severity levels 277
system information 81
system reboot 240
T
TACACS+ 162
tagged VLAN 109
Tech-Support 244
log enhancement 244
temperature indicator 82
Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus
162
time
current 83
Time (RFC-868) 83
time range 150
time server 83
time service protocol 83
format 83
ToS 218
trademarks 328
transceiver MultiSource Agreement (MSA) 32
transceivers 32
installation 33
removal 33
traps
destination 250
trunk group 143
trunking 143
trusted ports
DHCP snooping 179
tunnel protocol attribute
and RADIUS 169
tutorials 68
DHCP snooping 68
Type of Service 218
U
untrusted ports
DHCP snooping 179
user name 41
default 41
user profiles 163
V
Vendor Specific Attribute, See VSA 168
ventilation holes 26
VID 112, 113
number of possible VIDs 110
priority frame 110
VID (VLAN Identifier) 110
Virtual Local Area Network 84
VLAN 84
acceptable frame type 116
ID 109
ingress filtering 115
introduction 84, 109
number of VLANs 112
port number 113
port settings 115
port-based VLAN 121
port-based, all connected 122
Index
GS1350 Series User’s Guide
336
port-based, isolation 122
port-based, wizard 122
PVID 115
static VLAN 113
status 111, 112, 113
tagged 109
trunking 110, 116
type 85, 111
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) 84
VLAN ID 87, 109
VLAN trunking 116
Voice VLAN 116
VSA 168
W
wall mounting 26
warranty 328
note 328
web configurator
getting help 63
home 57
login 40
logout 63
navigation panel 59
weight, queuing 153
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) 153
WRR (Weighted Round Robin Scheduling) 152
Z
ZDP 44
ZON Utility 44
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) 245
ZyXEL Discovery Protocol 44